5) Aut. Tel.

IMCOSTM
Integrated Multimedia Communication System
Technical Manual
AUTOMATIC
TELEPHONE
SECTION
Gitiesse
Marine Electronics
Gitiesse S.r.l.
Via Al Ponte Polcevera 8/14
IMCOSTM 5350
16161 Genoa - Italy
Tel: +39 – 010 749 2263 / +39 – 010 749 2276 / Analogical Automatic Telephone
+39 – 010 749 2361 with universal support for Wall/Desk mounting
Fax: +39 – 010 740 21 31
E-Mail: gitiesse@gitiesse.com
Web-Site: www.gitiesse.com Rev. June 2007
UPPER VIEW REAR VIEW &

LED for
FIXING DETAILS (for Wall)
incoming call
2 x 4 mm
HOOK for PULSE/TONE SWITCH Fixing Screws
prevent Fitted Inside Telephone
unrolling
Telephone List
MUTE LABEL
80 mm
FASTMUTE FLASH
TF205A
1 2 3 R
ABC DEF
4 5 6 RPS
GHI JKL MNO
REDIAL
HANDSET 7 8 9 RP
PQRS TUV WXYZ
0 # P
]
MF PAUSE
RIGHT SIDE VIEW LEFT SIDE VIEW
VOLUME
TONO SUONERIA
SUONERIA
SWITCH for SWITCH for RJ11 SOCKET for

SOUNDER TONE SOUNDER VOLUME TELEPHONE LINE HANDSET
(3 OPT.) (3 OPT.)
Description * IMCOS 5350 is an analogical automatic telephone, suitable for ship's application.
It is complete with a universal desk/wall support:
- on the desk it is fixed in the upper position and allows to have inclined keypad;
- for wall installation it must be fixed in the lower position so keypad will be vertical.
Mounting Suitable for both desk or wall mounting.
Features * Extensible handset lead, up to 1,5 mt.
Handset is locked by a special hook to prevent unrolling;
Multi-frequency selection;
LED for incoming call signal;
“RP” button for automatic repeating of the last dialled number;
“P” button for pause function;
“R” button for special functions;
Switches for ring tone selection and ring volume adjust;
Special place for telephone list table positioning protected with plastic cover.
Casing ABS.
Connection RJ11 plug.
Wiring 2 twisted cores telephone type cable.
Fixing 2 x 4÷4,5 mm fixing screws.
Colour Standard Ivory (Option dark grey).
Weight 0.500 kg
IMCOStm Currently the only system in the world type approved by

five different Classifications Societies.
IMCOStm is an exclusive trademark of Gitiesse
* Gitiesse reserves the right to alter specifications without notice
Gitiesse
Marine Electronics
Gitiesse S.r.l.
IMCOSTM 5361
16161 Genoa - Italy
Tel: +39 – 010 749 2263 / +39 – 010 749 2276 / Console mounting Automatic Telephone
+39 – 010 749 2361 with lighted keypad
Fax: +39 – 010 740 21 31
Web-Site: www.gitiesse.com Rev. September 2007
CUT-OUT IN CONSOLE
UPPER VIEW & FIXING DETAILS SIDE VIEW
160 mm 150 mm
140 mm
IMCOS
REDIAL FLASH
RING IN USE
220 mm 196 mm 206 mm 90 mm

1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
* 0 #
Terminal strip
2 x Fixing Screws
Fixing Holes
4 x M5 AB
1x2x0.75 Scr.
Telephone Line
Description * IMCOS 5361 is a console mounting automatic telephone with lighted keypad, suitable for ship’s
applications.
Lighted keypad, that lights on every time handset is lifted, allows to operate also in low light conditions,
as in navigation console or others.
Mounting Console mounting.
“RING” led for incoming call signal;
“IN USE” led for line busy signal;
“REDIAL” button for automatic repeating of the last dialled number;
“FLASH” button for special functions.
Wiring Wiring connection: screw terminals fitted on the bottom, outside internal cover;
Cable type: 1 pair (2 twisted cores) screened cable.
Cable gland Not necessary.
Material ABS.
Colour Black.
Protection IP 44
Weight About 2 Kg

Gitiesse
Marine Electronics
Gitiesse S.r.l.
IMCOSTM 5362/C
16161 Genoa - Italy
Tel: +39 – 010 749 2263 / +39 – 010 749 2276 / Standard Automatic Telephone
+39 – 010 749 2361 Console Mounting
Fax: +39 – 010 740 21 31
CUT-OUT IN CONSOLE
UPPER VIEW & FIXING DETAILS SIDE VIEW
160 mm 150 mm
140 mm
IMCOS
REDIAL FLASH
RING IN USE
220 mm 196 mm 206 mm 90 mm

1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
* 0 #
Terminal strip
2 x Fixing Screws
Fixing Holes
4 x M5 AB
1x2x0.75 Scr.
Telephone Line
Description * IMCOS 5362/C is a standard console mounting automatic telephone, suitable for ship’s applications.
Mounting Console mounting.
Wiring Wiring connection: screw terminals fitted on the bottom, outside internal cover;
Cable gland Not necessary.
Material ABS.
Colour Black.
Protection IP 44
Weight About 2 Kg

Gitiesse
Marine Electronics
Gitiesse S.r.l.
IMCOSTM 5362/W
16161 Genoa - Italy
Tel: +39 – 010 749 2263 / +39 – 010 749 2276 / Waterproof Automatic Telephone
+39 – 010 749 2361 Wall Mounting
Fax: +39 – 010 740 21 31
UPPER VIEW SIDE VIEW

137 mm
160 mm
70 mm
IMCOS
TERMINAL STRIP
FITTED INSIDE
2 x Fixing Screws
REDIAL FLASH
RING IN USE
220 mm 244 mm 260 mm AB

1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
1x2x0.75 Scr.
* 0 #
Telephone Line
Ø7 mm
130 mm
1 x PG16 Cable Gland
1 x PG13,5 Cable Gland
Description * IMCOS 5362/W is a waterproof wall mounting automatic telephone, suitable for ship’s applications.
Mounting Wall mounting.
Wiring Wiring connection: screw terminals fitted inside the body;
Cable gland 1 x PG16
1 x PG13,5
Material ABS.
Colour Black.
Protection IP 56
Weight About 2 Kg

Gitiesse
Marine Electronics
Gitiesse S.r.l.
IMCOSTM 5362/W-HS
16161 Genoa - Italy
Tel: +39 – 010 749 2263 / +39 – 010 749 2276 / Waterproof Automatic Telephone
+39 – 010 749 2361 c/w Headset/Microphone, wall mounting
Fax: +39 – 010 740 21 31
UPPER VIEW SIDE VIEW

137 mm
160 mm
Ø7 mm 70 mm
Headset and
Microphone
IMCOS
TERMINAL STRIP
FITTED INSIDE
2 x Fixing Screws
REDIAL FLASH
RING IN USE
220 mm 244 mm AB
1 2 3 260 mm
4 5 6
7 8 9
1x2x0.75 Scr.
* 0 #
Telephone Line
Socket for
Headset/Microphone
Switch for enabling
Headset/microphone
130 mm
1 x PG16 Cable Gland
1 x PG13,5 Cable Gland
Description * IMCOS 5362/W-HS is a waterproof wall mounting automatic telephone c/w headset/microphone, suitable
to be use in noisy areas in ship’s applications.
Wiring Wiring connection: screw terminals fitted inside the body;
1 x PG13,5
Material ABS.
Colour Black.
Protection IP 56
Weight About 2,5 Kg

Gitiesse
Marine Electronics
Gitiesse S.r.l.
IMCOSTM 5313
16161 Genoa - Italy
Tel: +39 – 010 749 2263 / +39 – 010 749 2276 / Automatic Telephone J/B Socket
+39 – 010 749 2361
Fax: + 39 – 010 740 21 31
Web-Site: www.gitiesse.com
REAR VIEW SIDE VIEW

50 mm 20 mm
22 mm
20 mm
57 mm 57 mm
17 mm
4,5 mm 17 mm
TERMINAL
CONNECTION
UPSIDE VIEW TO TELEPHONE
50 mm
20 mm
BLACK YELLOW
L1 L2
RED GREEN
A B
Description* Junction Box used to connect Automatic Telephone.

Code IMCOS 5313: Telephone Socket.
Dimensions Wight 50 mm, Height 57 mm, Depth 20 mm

Gitiesse
Marine Electronics
Gitiesse S.r.l.
IMCOSTM 6081/X
16161 Genoa - Italy
Tel: +39 – 010 749 2263 / +39 – 010 749 2276 / Audio/Visual Relay unit
+39 – 010 749 2361 with integrated flashing light and bell
Fax: +39 – 010 740 21 31
Web-Site: www.gitiesse.com Rev. October 2005
FRONT VIEW &

FIXING DETAILS SIDE VIEW
160 mm 135 mm
Ø7 mm
TERMINAL STRIP
FITTED INSIDE
+ -
J1 J2 A B R1 R2 (~) (~)
1x2x0.75 Scr.
2x1.5 Scr.
2x1.5 Scr.
2x1.5 Scr.
220 mm 244 mm
N.O. Free Contact Output
Analogue Telephone Line Input
Sound Power Telephone Power Input
24 V DC or 220 V AC Power Supply

IMCOS
130 mm
2 x PG16 Cable Glands
Code IMCOS 6081/1: 24 V DC Audio/Visual Relay Unit with integrated flashing light and bell.
IMCOS 6081/2: 220 V AC Audio/Visual Relay Unit with integrated flashing light and bell.
Description * IMCOS 6081/x is a waterproof wall mounting integrated audio/visual relay unit, suitable for ship’s
applications. Integrated orange flashing light and bell avoid to install separated external devices for
incoming call signal, anyway a N.O. free contact is available for other purposes (signal to A/V columns or
other external audio/visual device).
This device is suitable for both IMCOStm analogue automatic telephone system and IMCOStm sound
power telephone network.
Features * Integrated orange flashing light with a plastic dome including a bulb.
Integrated bell, 100 dB
N.O. free contact.
Power supply IMCOS 6081/1: 24 V DC
IMCOS 6081/2: 220 V AC
Wiring Screw terminals fitted inside the body.
Material Coated steel.
Colour RAL 6034
IP-norm 56
Weight About 2 Kg

Gitiesse
Marine Electronics
Gitiesse S.r.l.
IMCOSTM 5326
16161 Genoa - Italy
Tel: +39 – 010 749 2263 / +39 – 010 749 2276 / Watertight Junction Box
+39 – 010 749 2361 for shore line
Fax: +39 – 010 740 21 31
FRONTAL VIEW SIDE VIEW

76 mm 51 mm
38 mm
75 mm 75 mm
FIXING DETAILS & Cable Gland

TERMINAL STRIP PG13,5 (1/2")
76 mm
67 mm
TA TB 52 mm 75 mm
4 Fixing Holes
Ø 4 mm
Description * IMCOS 5326 is a little junction box to put in open area siutable for connecting one or more shore lines
to PABX.
Features IMCOS 5326: Watertight Junction Box for shore line.
Protection IP 55
Cable glands N° 2 x PG13,5 (1/2”).

AUTOMATIC
TELEPHONE IMCOS 5350
User Manual
IMCOSTM
Gitiesse
Marine Electronics
Genova - Italy
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INDOOR TELEPHONE SET TF 205A
2. FUNCTION KEYS
3. SETTING SWITCHES, VOLUME AND TONE ADJUSTMENT, SPECIAL KEYS
4. INSTALLATION
5. TECHNICAL NOTES
AC5075EN/0710 Page 3
Rev. n. 5310
1. TELEPHONE SET TF 205A
Rev. n. 5310
2. FUNCTION KEYS
R - Flash key. Used to transfer the incoming call to an other extension.

RPS - Auxiliary memory key. Pressing this key, before hanging up, will store the last
dialed number (memory #1). This memory can then be recalled later
independently from memory #2 (RP)
RP - Last number recall. Pressing this key will recall the last dialed number
(memory #2).
P - Pause key. Used on some PBX in order to insert a pause between the area
code and the telephone number.
3. SETTING SWITCHES, VOLUME AND TONE ADJUSTMENT, SPECIAL KEYS
Under the telephone directory label, are located one switch:
LD-MF - Set the selection mode to decadic (LD) or multifrequency (MF)
On the right side of TF 205A, are located two sliders, each one with three positions,
used to change the ringing volume and tone. The incoming call is furthermore
highlighted by a led, located in the upper right corner, that flashes while telephone
rings.
In the inner side of the handset, it is located a little button which pressed mutes the
handset microphone protecting privacy while talking to other persons in the room.
On the keypad the key «*» may be used for temporary switching from decadic to
multifrequency selection mode.
4. INSTALLATION
The telephone set TF 205A is supplied complete with a plastic support base and a
reversible handset clip. These two accessories make the telephone suitable for desk
top or wall mounting installation.
Desktop installation:
Find a suitable place on the desk. Mount the plastic support base in the bottom of the
telephone using the upper notches. This will give the telephone an inclined
ergonomic position. Connect the telephone to his handset through the ribbon cable.
Connect the telephone set to the telephone plug through the RJ11 flat cable. Set as
required switches and volume and tone adjustment slides.
Now the telephone set is ready for use.
Rev. n. 5310
Wall mounting installation:
Find a suitable place on the wall. Mount the plastic support base in the bottom of the
telephone using the lower notches. This will give the telephone an inclined ergonomic
position for wall mounting. Insert two screws ∅4 x 30mm in the wall leaving enough
space to hang the telephone on their heads. Pull out the handset clip, rotate it by
180° and reinsert it in its place. Connect the telephone to his handset through the
ribbon cable. Hang the handset. Connect the telephone set to the telephone plug
through the RJ11 flat cable. Set as required switches and volume and tone
adjustment slides.
Now the telephone set is ready for use.
5. Technical notes:
The telephone set TF 205A has the following factory default settings:
- Multifrequency selection
- Telephone line impedance 600 ohms
- Flash time 100 ms
- Terminal selected as PBX user
Rev. n. 5310
AUTOMATIC TELEPHONE
EXCHANGE
Admin Manual
IMCOSTM
Gitiesse
Marine Electronics
Genova – Italy
Programming Manual for Automatic Telephone Exchange
Admin Programming
II
Admin Programming
CONTENTS
1. CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING ....................................................... 1

1.1 INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 TO ENTER THE PROGRAMMING MODE ................................................................................. 1
1.3 PERMANENT UPDATE PROCEDURE ...................................................................................... 2
1.4 NUMBERING PLAN .................................................................................................................... 2
1.5 ADMIN PROGRAMMING INDEX................................................................................................ 6
1.6 DEFAULT VALUES ..................................................................................................................... 8
2. PRE-PROGRAMMED DATABASE ................................................................... 35

2.1 LOCATION PROGRAM (PGM 100) ....................................................................................... 35
2.2 RACK SLOT ASSIGNMENT (PGM 101) ................................................................................ 37
2.3 WTIB PORT NUMBER ASSIGNMENT (PGM 102)................................................................ 39
2.4 LOGICAL SLOT ASSIGNMENT (PGM 103) .......................................................................... 39
2.5 NUMBERING PLAN TYPE (PGM 104) .................................................................................. 40
2.6 FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN (PGM 105) ........................................................................... 41
2.7 FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN (PGM 106-107).................................................................... 42
2.8 IP SETTING (PGM 108) ......................................................................................................... 44
3. STATION PROGRAMMING............................................................................... 45
3.1 STATION ID (PGM 110) ......................................................................................................... 45
3.2 STATION ATTRIBUTE – I (PGM 111).................................................................................... 48
3.3 STATION ATTRIBUTE - II (PGM 112) ................................................................................... 49
3.4 STATION ATTRIBUTE - III (PGM 113) .................................................................................. 51
3.5 ISDN STATION ATTRIBUTE (PGM 114) ............................................................................... 53
3.6 FLEX BUTTON ASSIGNMENT (PGM 115)............................................................................ 55
3.7 STATION COS (PGM 116)..................................................................................................... 57
3.8 CO LINE GROUP ACCESS (PGM 117)................................................................................. 59
3.9 INTERNAL PAGE ZONE (PGM 118) ..................................................................................... 60
3.10 CONFERENCE PAGE ZONE (PGM 119).......................................................................... 61
3.11 ICM TENANCY GROUP (PGM 120).................................................................................. 62
3.12 PRESET CALL FORWARD (PGM 121)............................................................................. 63
3.13 HOT LINE / WARM LINE (PGM 122)................................................................................. 64
3.14 CTI STATION ATTRIBUTE (PGM 123) ............................................................................. 65
3.15 SMDR ACCOUNT GROUP (PGM 124) ............................................................................. 66
4. CO LINE PROGRAMMING................................................................................ 67
4.1 CO SERVICE TYPE (PGM 140)............................................................................................. 67
4.2 CO LINE ATTRIBUTE – I (PGM 141)..................................................................................... 69
4.3 CO LINE ATTRIBUTE – II (PGM 142).................................................................................... 71
4.4 ISDN CO LINE ATTRIBUTE (PGM 143) ................................................................................ 73
4.5 CO RING ASSIGNMENT (PGM 144) ..................................................................................... 74
4.6 CO RING ASSIGNMENT DISPLAY (PGM 145) ....................................................................... 75
III
Admin Programming
5. SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING........................................................................ 76

5.1 SYSTEM ATTRIBUTE - I (PGM 160) ..................................................................................... 76
5.2 SYSTEM ATTRIBUTE - II (PGM 161) .................................................................................... 78
5.3 ADMIN PASSWORD (PGM 162)............................................................................................ 80
5.4 ALARM ATTRIBUTES (PGM 163) ......................................................................................... 81
5.5 ATTENDANT ASSIGNMENT (PGM 164)............................................................................... 82
5.6 AUTO ATTENDANT VMIB ANNC ASSIGNMENT (PGM 165)............................................... 83
5.7 CO-TO-CO COS (PGM 166) .................................................................................................. 84
5.8 DID/DISA DESTINATION (PGM 167) .................................................................................... 85
5.9 EXTERNAL CONTROL CONTACT (PGM 168) ..................................................................... 86
5.10 LCD TIME/DATE/LANGUAGE DISPLAY MODE (PGM 169) ............................................ 87
5.11 MODEM (PGM 170) ........................................................................................................... 88
5.12 MUSIC (PGM 171) ............................................................................................................. 89
5.13 PBX ACCESS CODE (PGM 172) ...................................................................................... 91
5.14 PLA PRIORITY SETTING (PGM 173) ............................................................................... 91
5.15 RS-232C PORT SETTING (PGM 174) .............................................................................. 92
5.16 PRINT PORT SELECTION (PGM 175).............................................................................. 93
5.17 PULSE DIAL RATIO (PGM 176) ........................................................................................ 94
5.18 SMDR ATTRIBUTES (PGM 177)....................................................................................... 95
5.19 SYSTEM TIME/DATE SETTING (PGM 178) ..................................................................... 98
5.20 LINKED STATION PAIRS TABLE (PGM 179) ................................................................... 99
5.21 CIDU SETTING (PGM 185).............................................................................................. 100
6. SYSTEM TIMERS............................................................................................. 101

6.1 SYSTEM TIMERS - I (PGM 180).......................................................................................... 101
6.2 SYSTEM TIMERS - II (PGM 181)......................................................................................... 103
6.3 SYSTEM TIMERS - III (PGM 182)........................................................................................ 105
7. DCOB ATTRIBUTE (PGM 186 - PGM 187)..................................................... 106

7.1 DCOB SYS ATTRIBUTE (PGM 186) ...................................................................................... 106
7.2 DCOB CO LINE ATTRIBUTE (PGM 187) ............................................................................ 107
8. STATION GROUP PROGRAMMING (PGM 190 - PGM 191).......................... 108

8.1 STATION GROUP ASSIGN (PGM 190)............................................................................... 109
8.2 STATION GROUP ATTRIBUTE (PGM 191) ........................................................................ 110
8.2.1 CIRCULAR/TERMINAL GROUP ATTRIBUTE ................................................................... 110
8.2.2 UCD GROUP ATTRIBUTE ................................................................................................. 112
8.2.3 RING GROUP ATTRIBUTE ................................................................................................ 114
8.2.4 VM GROUP ATTRIBUTE.................................................................................................... 116
8.2.5 PICK-UP GROUP ATTRIBUTE .......................................................................................... 118
9. ISDN PROGRAM ............................................................................................. 119

9.1 ISDN ATTRIBUTE (PGM 200).............................................................................................. 119
9.2 COLP TABLE (PGM 201) ..................................................................................................... 121
9.3 MSN TABLE (PGM 202)....................................................................................................... 122
IV
Admin Programming
10. LCR .................................................................................................................. 123

10.1 LCR ATTRIBUTES (PGM 220) ........................................................................................ 123
10.2 LEADING DIGIT TABLE (PGM 221) ................................................................................ 125
10.3 DIGIT MODIFICATION TABLE (PGM 222)...................................................................... 127
10.4 LCR TABLE INITIALIZATION (PGM 223)........................................................................ 129
11. TOLL TABLE ................................................................................................... 131

11.1 TOLL EXCEPTION TABLE (PGM 224)............................................................................ 131
11.2 CANNED TOLL TABLE (PGM 225) ................................................................................. 133
11.3 EMERGENCY CODE TABLE (PGM 226)........................................................................ 134
12. TABLES ........................................................................................................... 135

12.1 AUTHORIZATION CODE TABLE (PGM 227).................................................................. 135
12.2 CUSTOM CALL ROUTING (PGM 228)............................................................................ 136
12.3 EXECUTIVE / SECRETARY TABLE (PGM 229) ............................................................. 138
12.4 DID DIGITS CONVERSION TABLE (PGM 230) .............................................................. 139
12.5 FLEXIBLE DID TABLE (PGM 231) .................................................................................. 140
12.6 SYSTEM SPEED ZONE (PGM 232)................................................................................ 142
12.7 WEEKLY TIME TABLE (PGM 233).................................................................................. 143
12.8 VOICE MAIL DIALING TABLE (PGM 234) ...................................................................... 144
12.9 TIE ROUTING TABLE (PGM 235) ................................................................................... 145
13. NETWORKING ATTRIBUTE ........................................................................... 146

13.1 NETWORKING BASIC ATTRIBUTE (PGM 320) ............................................................. 146
13.2 NETWORKING SUPPLEMENTARY ATTRIBUTE (PGM 321) ........................................ 147
13.3 NETWORKING CO LINE ATTRIBUTE (PGM 322).......................................................... 148
13.4 NETWORKING ATTENDANT ASSIGNMENT (PGM 323) ................................................. 149
13.5 NETWORKING ROUTING TABLE (PGM 324)................................................................... 150
14. VOIB ATTRIBUTE ........................................................................................... 151

14.1 VOIP IP SETTING (PGM 340) ......................................................................................... 151
15. NATION SPECIFIC PROGRAMMING ............................................................. 152

15.1 DTIB RX GAIN CONTROL (PGM 400) ............................................................................ 152
15.2 SLIB RX GAIN CONTROL (PGM 401)............................................................................. 153
15.3 CTR SLIB RX GAIN CONTROL (PGM 402) .................................................................... 153
15.4 WTIB RX GAIN CONTROL (PGM 403) ........................................................................... 154
15.5 ACOB RX GAIN CONTROL (PGM 404) .......................................................................... 154
15.6 CTR ACOB RX GAIN CONTROL (PGM 405).................................................................. 155
15.7 DCOB RX GAIN CONTROL (PGM 406) .......................................................................... 155
15.8 VMIB RX GAIN CONTROL (PGM 407)............................................................................ 156
15.9 DTMF RCVR RX GAIN CONTROL (PGM 408) ............................................................... 156
15.10 EXT PAGE RX GAIN CONTROL (PGM 409) ..................................................................... 157
15.11 CPT RX GAIN CONTROL (PGM 410) ................................................................................ 157
15.12 MODEM RX GAIN CONTROL (PGM 411) ....................................................................... 158
15.13 SHORT SLIB GAIN CONTROL (PGM 412) ( SAF ONLY ) ............................................. 159
V
Admin Programming
15.14 LONG SLIB GAIN CONTROL (PGM 413) ( TELKOM ONLY ) ......................................... 160
15.15 FAR SLIB GAIN CONTROL (PGM 414) ( TELKOM ONLY ) ............................................ 160
15.16 SHORT ACO GAIN CONTROL (PGM 415) ( TELKOM ONLY )..................................... 161
15.17 LONG ACO GAIN CONTROL (PGM 416) ( TELKOM ONLY ) ......................................... 162
15.18 SYSTEM TONE FREQUENCY (PGM 420)...................................................................... 163
15.19 DIFFERENTIAL RING FREQUENCY (PGM 421)............................................................ 164
15.20 DISTINCT RING FREQUENCY (PGM 422) ..................................................................... 165
15.21 ACNR TONE CADENCE (PGM 423) ............................................................................... 166
16. INITIALIZATION (PGM 450) ......................................................................... 167
17. PRINT PROT DATABASE (PGM 451).......................................................... 168
VI
Admin Programming
1. CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

1.1 INTRODUCTION
The LDK Key Telephone System can be programmed to meet each customer's individual need. All
programming is done at station 100 (station port # 00) using KD-36D or LKD-30/44 digital key
telephone. (You cannot program with Large LCD keyset.) Additional programming stations may be
assigned (PGM 113-BTN 1), but only 1 keyset can be active in programming mode at any one time.
Upon entering the program mode, the key telephone at station 100 cannot operate as a normal
telephone but as a programming instrument with all of the buttons redefined. The keys of the dial pad
are used to enter the various data fields and to enter numerical information. The 24 buttons located at
the top of the phone (Flexible Buttons) are used to indicate the specific data field and to enter
information. Sometimes the [SPEED] button and ‘*’ of the dial pad is used to delete the data or to
indicate end of data input and the [REDIAL] button is used to delete one digit or character from the
end of entered digits or characters.
See TABLE 1.6.1 - 1.6.27 for default data. If this pre-programming suits the customer, additional
admin program is not necessary. To change admin data, the user enters the admin programming
mode and select program code. During admin programming, other keysets operate normally. (While
activating LDK Admin, no keyset can enter Admin mode and the reverse also.)
When Admin programming, LCD and LEDs indicate the current programmed data and status. If the
programmer enters correct data, then LCD and LEDs show the entered data and the data is stored in
the temporary buffer area. Real system database is not changed and has no effect on telephone
operation unless permanent updating procedure is executed. Pressing the [HOLD/SAVE] button, all
data in the temporary buffer (same as LCD and LEDs show their status) is saved into permanent
memory. Tones are provided to let the programmer know data entry is correct (confirmation tone) or
not (error tone).
To return the parent state while admin programming, press the [CONF] button. Pressing the [CONF]
button, temporary data fields are cleared.
To reset the system, enter PGM 450 – BTN 15 and press [HOLD/SAVE] button. Or, the system will be
reset automatically after programming PGM100 – BTN 1 (Nation Code Assign)
1.2 TO ENTER THE PROGRAMMING MODE
1. Lift handset or press the [MON] button on the admin station, and hear ICM dial tone (optional).
2. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button and dial ＊# (Confirmation tone is heard).
3. Enter admin password if the password has been set. This places the station into the admin
programming mode (Confirmation tone is heard).
4. Each program is accessed by pressing the [TRANS/PGM] button and dialing the three-digit
program number. If an error is made while entering data, the [TRANS/PGM] button can go the
previous status. When the [TRANS/PGM] button is pressed, the LCD will display;
ENTER PROGRAM CODE
1
Admin Programming
1.3 PERMANENT UPDATE PROCEDURE
When the data has been entered, the [HOLD/SAVE] button is used to store the data permanently. If
all data was entered correctly, confirmation tone is heard when pressing the [HOLD/SAVE] button. If
there were any errors in the entry, then an error tone is presented and data is not stored in the
permanent memory.
1.4 NUMBERING PLAN
The following numbering plan can be changed by Admin Programming 104-107 depending on the
user's needs.
NUMBER ITEM REMARK

LDK-300 LDK-100
100 – 399 100-227 Intercom Call
620 – 667 620-634 Group Pilot Number
501 – 535 501-515 Internal Page Zone
543 543 Internal All Call Page
544 544 Meet Me Page
545 545 External Page Zone 1
548 548 External All Call Page
549 549 All Call Page (Int & Ext)
550 550 SMDR Account Code Enter SLT
551 551 Flash Command to CO Line SLT
552 552 Last Number Redial SLT
553 553 DND (Toggle On/Off) SLT
554 554 Call Forward SLT
555 555 Speed Dial Programming SLT
556 556 Message Wait/Callback Enable SLT
557 557 Message Wait/Callback Return SLT
558 558 Speed Dial Access SLT
559 559 Cancel DND/FWD/Pre-MSG SLT
560 560 System Hold SLT
561 561 Station Relocation Backup
562 562 Station Relocation Retrieve
563 563 Programming Mode Enter Code SLT
564 564 ACD Reroute
565 565 Alarm Reset
566 566 Group Call Pickup
568 568 UCD DND
569 569 Night Answer
601 - 619 601-610 Call Parking Locations
7 7 Direct Call Pickup
801-872 801-824 CO Group Access
88001-88200 8801-8840 Individual CO Access
8901 8901 Tie Routing Access
2
Admin Programming
NUMBER
ITEM REMARK
LDK-300 LDK-100
8* 8* Retrieve Held CO Line
8#xxx 8#xx Retrieve Held Individual CO Line
9 9 Access CO Line In the 1st available CO Group
0 0 Attendant Call
#*1 #*1 1st Door Open
#*2 #*2 2nd Door Open
#*3 #*3 3rd Door Open
#*4 #*4 4th Door Open
#*7 N/A 7th Door Open LDK-300 Only
*8 *8 VM Message Waiting Enable
*9 *9 VM Message Waiting Disable
To enter user programming mode, press the [TRANS/PGM] button in a keyset or dial 5 6 3
(Programming enter code) in a SLT.
The following numbering plan is fixed, so it cannot be changed by Admin Programming.
1) For the stations
NUMBER ITEM REMARK

11 Differential Ring Keyset
12 Intercom Answer Mode (1 HF / 2 TONE / 3 PV) Keyset
21 Station COS Down
22 Station COS Restore
23 Walking COS Keyset
31 Authorization Code Registration
32 Authorization Code Change
41 Wake-up Time Registration (One-time/ Continuous)
42 Wake-up Time Cancel
51 Pre-selected MSG Activation
52 Set Custom Message
61 Record VMIB User Greeting
62 Listen VMIB Time & Date
63 Listen VMIB Station Number
64 Listen VMIB Station Status
65 Record VMIB Page Message
66 Erase VMIB User Greeting
67 Erase VMIB Page Message
71 LCD Display Mode (English/Domestic Language) Keyset
72 MPB Version Display Keyset
73 Background Music Keyset
74 Station User Name Registration
75 Headset/Speakerphone Mode Keyset
76 Headset Ring Mode Keyset
77 WTU Station Number Receive Keyset
78 Serial No/SW Packages Keyset with LCD
3
Admin Programming
2) For the attendant
NUMBER ITEM REMARK

0111 Print SMDR (Station Base) System Attendant
0112 Delete SMDR (Station Base) System Attendant
0113 Print SMDR (Group Base) System Attendant
0114 Delete SMDR (Group Base) System Attendant
0115 Display Call Charge System Attendant
0116 Abort Printing System Attendant
0117 Print Lost Call System Attendant
0118 Delete Lost Call System Attendant
0121 Print All Summary System Attendant
0122 Print All Periodically System Attendant
0123 Abort Periodic Printing System Attendant
0124 Print ATD Traffic System Attendant
0125 Print Call Summary System Attendant
0126 Print All Hourly System Attendant
0127 Print H/W Usage System Attendant
0128 Print CO Summary System Attendant
0129 Print CO Hourly System Attendant
021 Station COS Down (COS 7) Attendant
022 Station COS Restore Attendant
031 Authorization Code Cancel System Attendant
041 System Date/Time Setting Attendant
042 Wake-up Time Registration (One-time /Continuous) Attendant
043 Wake-up Time Cancel System Attendant
044 LCD Date Mode Change System Attendant
045 LCD Time Mode Change System Attendant
046 Use Network Time & Date System Attendant
051 Pre-select MSG Activation Attendant
052 Pre-select MSG Deactivation Attendant
053 Custom Display Message Program (11-20) System Attendant
054 Erase VM MSG Attendant
06 Record VMIB System Greeting System Attendant
071 DND/Call Forward/Pre-selected MSG Cancel Attendant
072 Register Station Name Attendant
073 Disable CO Outgoing System Attendant
074 Automatic Day/Night/Weekend Mode Program Attendant
075 ICM BOX BGM Channel select Attendant
076 External Page Music -1 Assignment/Cancel Attendant
079 Prepaid Call
07* LCD Display Language
0# WHTU Subscription
4
Admin Programming
3) Flexible Button Programming Code
NUMBER ITEM REMARK

11 Differential Ring
21 Station COS Down
22 Station COS Restore
23 Walking COS
31 Authorization Code Registration
32 Authorization Code Change
41 Wake-up Time Registration (One-time /Continuous)
42 Wake-up Time Cancel
51 Pre-selected MSG Activation
52 Set Custom Message
53 CLIR Key
54 Two Way Recording
61 Record VMIB User Greeting
64 Listen VMIB Station Status
66 Erase VMIB User Greeting
71 LCD Display Mode (English/Domestic Language)
73 Background Music
74 Station User Name Registration
75 Headset/Speakerphone Mode
76 HeadSet Ring Mode
80 Account Code Activation
81 DID Call Wait
83 [ICM Hold] BTN Assignment
84 [LOOP] BTN Assignment
85 [Camp-on] BTN Assignment
86 [INTRUSION] BTN Assignment System Attendant
87 [UCD DND] BTN Assignment + Hunt Grp No.
89 Keypad Facility Key
8* {ACD STATUS} BTN Assignment
91 [CONF] BTN Assignment 2/8 BTN Keyset
92 [CALLBK] BTN Assignment 2/8 BTN Keyset
93 [DND/FWD] BTN Assignment 2/8 BTN Keyset
94 [FLASH] BTN Assignment 2/8 BTN Keyset
95 [MUTE] BTN Assignment 2/8 BTN Keyset
96 [MON] BTN Assignment 2/8 BTN Keyset
97 [REDIAL] BTN Assignment 2/8 BTN Keyset
5
Admin Programming
1.5 ADMIN PROGRAMMING INDEX

MAIN MENU PGM ITEM
PRE-PROGRAMMED DATABASE 100 Location Program
101 Rack Slot Assignment
102 WTIB Port number Assignment
103 Logical Slot Assignment
104 Numbering Plan Type
105 Flexible Number Plan – Station Number
106 Flexible Number Plan A
107 Flexible Number Plan B
108 IP Setting
STATION BASE PROGRAM 110 Station ID
111 Station Attribute I
112 Station Attribute II
113 Station Attribute III
114 ISDN Station Attribute
115 Flex Button Assignment
116 Station COS
117 CO Line Group Access
118 Internal Page Zone
119 Conference Page Zone
120 ICM Tenancy Group
121 Preset Call Forward
122 Hot/Warm Line Selection
123 CTI Station Attribute
124 SMDR Account Group
CO LINE BASE PROGRAM 140 CO Service Type
141 CO Line Attribute I
142 CO Line Attribute II
143 ISDN CO Line Attribute
144 CO Ring Assignment
145 CO Ring Assignment Display
SYSTEM BASE PROGRAM 160 System Attribute – I
161 System Attribute – II
162 Admin Password
163 Alarm Attributes
164 Attendant Assignment
165 Auto Attendant VMIB Annc. Assignment
166 CO-to-CO COS
167 DID/DISA Destination
168 External Control Contact
169 LCD Date/Time/Language Display Mode
170 Modem
171 Music
172 PBX Access Code
173 PLA Priority Setting
174 RS-232C Port Setting
175 Print Port Selection
176 Pulse Dial Ratio
177 SMDR Attributes
178 System Date/Time Setting
179 Linked Station Pairs Table
6
Admin Programming
MAIN MENU PGM ITEM

SYSTEM BASE PROGRAM 180 System Timers – I
181 System Timers – II
182 System Timers – III
185 CIDU Setting
DCOB 186 DCOB System attribute
187 DCOB CO Line Attribute
STATION GROUP 190 Station Group Assign
191 Station Group Attribute
ISDN SYSTEM BASE PROGRAM 200 ISDN Attributes
201 COLP Table
202 MSN Table
TABLES 220 LCR Attributes
221 LCR – Leading Digit Table
222 LCR – Digit Modification Table
223 LCR Table Initialization
224 Toll Exception Table – Allow A (Entry no:01-30)
Toll Exception Table – Deny A (Entry no:01-30)
Toll Exception Table – Allow B (Entry no:01-30)
Toll Exception Table – Deny B (Entry no:01-30)
225 Canned Toll Table –Allow (Entry no:01-10)
Canned Toll Table –Deny (Entry no:01-10)
226 Emergency Code Table
227 Authorization Code Table
228 Customer Call Routing
229 Executive/Secretary Table
230 DID Digit Conversion Table
231 Flexible DID Table
232 System Speed Zone
233 Weekly Time Table
234 Voice Mail Dialing Table
235 Tie Routing Table
NETWORKING 320 Networking Basic Attribute
321 Networking Supplementary Attribute
322 Networking CO Line Attribute
323 Networking Attendant Assignment
324 Networking Routing Table
VOIB 340 VOIB IP Setting
NATION SPECIFIC 400 DTIB Rx Gain Control
401 SLIB Rx Gain Control
402 SLIB12 Rx Gain Control
403 WTIB Rx Gain Control
404 ACOB Rx Gain Control
405 ACOB8 Rx Gain Control
406 DCOB Rx Gain Control
407 VMIB Rx Gain Control
408 DTMF Receiver Rx Gain Control
409 EXT Page Rx Gain Control
410 CPTU Rx Gain Control
7
Admin Programming
MAIN MENU PGM ITEM

NATION SPECIFIC 411 Modem Rx Gain Control
412 Short SLIB Gain Control
413 Long SLIB Gain Control
414 Far SLIB Gain Control
415 Short ACO Gain Control
416 Long ACO Gain Control
420 System Tone Frequency
421 Differential Ring Frequency
422 Distinct CO Ring Frequency
423 ACNR Tone Cadence
425 Singular Table (Korea Only)
INITIALIZATION (DB INIT) 450 Initialization
PRINT DATABASE 451 Print Prot Database
1.6 DEFAULT VALUES
TABLE 1.6.1 LOCATION PROGRAM
PGM BTN ITEM DEFAULT REMARK

100 1 Nation Code 82 Max 4 digits
2 Customer Site Name . Max 23 digits
TABLE 1.6.2 RACK SLOT ASSIGNMENT
PGM BTN ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

101 - Slot Assignment Refer to Note 2 Refer to Note 1 In case of PRIB assignment, it is
possible to program logical port number.
Note.1) If the DIP switch of the manual board detection (DIP Switch 8) is ON, system will detect the installed
board type automatically. If the DIP switch 8 is OFF, the board type code must be entered at each slot.
After manual Rack Slot assignment, user should reset the system manually.
Note.2) Board Type Code Table:
STA CODE COL CODE STA & COL CODE Etc CODE
DTIB12 11 PRIB 31 STIB 51 VMIB 61
DTIB24 12 BRIB 32 MISB 71
SLIB6 13 LCOB4 33
SLIB12 14 LCOB8 34
WTIB 15 DIDB 35
DSIB 18 BWDIDB 36
TLIB 37
EMIB 38
AC15 39
DCOB 40
VOIB 41
NPRIB 42(LDK-100)
NBRIB(8) 43(LDK-100)
NBRIB(4) 44(LDK-100)
CLCOB8 45
RDIB 46
EMIB8 47
8
Admin Programming
TABLE 1.6.3 WTIB PORT NUMBER ASSIGNMENT
RANGE
LDK-300 LDK-100
WTIB Port Number 008 – 192 08-80 8 When LDK-100 has one
102 -
Assignment (Multiple of 8) (Multiple of 8) rack : 08-40
TABLE 1.6.4 LOGICAL SLOT ASSIGNMENT

103 1 COL Board Refer to Note
2 STA Board Refer to Note
3 VMIB Not Assigned
Note) If the DIP switch of the manual board detection DIP Switch 8) is ON, system will detect the logical slot
assign in sequence as increase order automatically. If the DIP switch 8 is OFF, the logical slot assignment
must be entered at each board type. After manual logical slot assignment, user should reset the system
manually.
TABLE 1.6.5 NUMBERING PLAN TYPE
STA RANGE
LDK-300 LDK-100
st
104 As the basic type, the 1
1 Number Set Type 1 100 – 399 100 – 227 Yes digit of station number
should be 1 – 4.
The station number can be
2 Number Set Type 2 100 – 399 100 – 227 No
changed within 799.
Max Station Ports: 60
6 Number Set Type 6 21 – 79 21 – 79 No Stations above Max ports
will be displayed “***”
Max Station Ports: 200
7 Number Set Type 7 100 – 299 100 – 227 No Stations above Max ports
will be displayed “***”
The station number can be
changed within 999.
9
Admin Programming
TABLE 1.6.6 FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN

NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER REMARK
PGM BTN FIELD
SET1 SET2 SET3 SET4 SET5 SET6 SET7 SET8
100 - 399 100 - 399
100 - 399 100 - 399 700 - 999 200 - 499 10 - 79 100 - 299 LDK-300
105 (100 - 799) (100 - 999)
- Intercom Call
100 - 227 100 - 227
100 -227 100 - 227 700 - 827 200 - 327 10 - 79 100 - 227 LDK-100
(100 - 799) (100 - 999)
620 - 667 *620 - *667 620 - 667 620 - 667 620 - 667 *620 - *667 620 - 667 *620 - *667 LDK-300
1 Group Pilot Number
620 - 634 *620 - *634 620 - 634 620 - 634 620 - 634 *620 - *634 620 - 634 *620 - *634 LDK-100
501 - 535 *501 - *535 #01 - #35 #01 - #35 #01 - #35 *501 - *535 401 - 419 *501 - *535 LDK-300
2 Internal Page Zone
501 - 515 *501 - *515 #01 - #15 #01 - #15 #01 - #15 *501 - *515 401 - 415 *501 - *515 LDK-100
3 Internal All Call Page 543 *543 #5 #7 #5 *543 43 *543
4 Meet Me Page 544 *544 ## ## ## *544 44 *544
5 External Page Zone 1 545 *545 #6 #41 #6 *545 45 *545
8 External All Call Page 548 *548 #9 #5 #9 *548 48 *548
9 All Call Page (Int & Ext) 549 *549 #00 #6 #00 *549 49 *549
10 SMDR Account Code Enter 550 *550 550 550 50 *550 50 *550 SLT
106 11 Flash Command to CO Line 551 *551 551 551 *551 51 *551 SLT
51
12 Last Number Redial 552 *552 552 552 52 *552 52 *552 SLT
13 DND (Toggle On/Off) 553 *553 553 553 53 *553 53 *553 SLT
14 Call Forward 554 *554 554 554 54 *554 54 *554 SLT
15 Speed Dial Programming 555 *555 555 *40 55 *555 55 *555 SLT
16 Message Wait/Callback Enable 556 *556 556 *66 56 *556 56 *556
17 Message Wait/Callback Return 557 *557 557 *67 57 *557 57 *557 SLT
18 Speed Dial Access 558 *558 558 *7 58 *558 58 *558 SLT
19 Cancel DND/FWD/Pre-MSG 559 *559 559 559 59 *559 59 *559 SLT
20 System Hold 560 *560 560 560 690 *560 30 *560 SLT
21 Station Relocation Backup 561 *561 561 561 691 *561 … *561
22 Station Relocation Retrieve 562 *562 562 562 692 *562 … *562
23 Programming Mode Enter Code 563 *563 563 563 693 *3 33 *3 SLT
24 ACD Reroute 564 *564 564 564 694 *4 34 *4
10
Admin Programming
NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER REMARK

PGM BTN FIELD
SET1 SET2 SET3 SET4 SET5 SET6 SET7 SET8
1 Alarm Reset 565 *565 565 *565 695 *565 35 *565
2 Group Call Pickup 566 *566 ** *1 ** *566 36 *566
3 UCD DND 568 *568 568 568 698 *568 68 *568
4 Night Answer 569 *569 577 2 699 *569 69 *569
601 - 619 *601 -* 619 601 – 619 601-619 601 - 619 *601 -* 619 601 - 619 *601 -* 619 LDK-300
5 Call Parking Locations
601 - 610 *601 -* 610 601 – 610 601-610 601 - 610 *601 -* 610 601 - 610 *601 -* 610 LDK-100
6 Direct Call Pickup 7 *7 *7 *42 7 *7 7 *7
801-872 801-872 801-872 401-472 801-872 801-872 801-872 #801-#872 LDK-300
7 CO Group Access
801-824 801-824 801-824 401-424 801-824 801-824 801-824
#801-#824 LDK-100
#88001-
88001-88200 88001-8820088001-8820048001-48200 88001-88200 88001-8820088001-88200 LDK-300
8 Individual CO Access #88200
8801-8840 8801-8840 8801-8840 4801-4840 8801-8840 8801-8840 8801-8840 #8801-#8840 LDK-100
9 Tie Routing Access 8901 8901 8901 4901 89 8901 8901 #401
10 Retrieve Held CO Line 8* 8* 8* 4* 8* 8* 8* #8*
107 8#xxx 8#xxx 8#xxx 4#xxx 8#xxx 8#xxx 8#xxx #8#xxx LDK-300
11 Retrieve Held Individual CO Line
8#xx 8#xx 8#xx 4#xx 8#xx 8#xx 8#xx #8#xx LDK-100
Access CO Line In the 1st
12 9 9 9 1 0 9 9 0
available CO Group
13 Attendant Call 0 0 0 0 9 0 0 #9
14 1st Door Open #*1 #*1 #*1 #*1 #*1 #*1 #*1 #*1
15 2nd Door Open #*2 #*2 #*2 #*2 #*2 #*2 #*2 #*2
16 3rd Door Open #*3 #*3 #*3 #*3 #*3 #*3 #*3 #*3
17 4th Door Open #*4 #*4 #*4 #*4 #*4 #*4 #*4 #*4
18 5th Door Open #*5 #*5 #*5 #*5 #*5 #*5 #*5 #*5
19 6th Door Open #*6 #*6 #*6 #*6 #*6 #*6 #*6 #*6
#*7 #*7 #*7 #*7 #*7 #*7 #*7 #*7 LDK-300
20 7th Door Open
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A LDK-100
21 VM Message Waiting Enable *8 *8 *8 *8 *8 *8 *8 *8
22 VM Message Waiting Disable *9 *9 *9 *9 *9 *9 *9 *9
11
Admin Programming
TABLE 1.6.7 IP SETTING

108 1 IP Name Max 16
2 Server IP Address 12 Digits Skip : #
3 CLI IP Address 12 Digits
4 Gateway Address 12 Digits
5 Subnet Mask 12 Digits 255.255.255.0
TABLE 1.6.8 STATION ID ASSIGNMENT

RANGE
LDK-300 LDK-100
110 1 ID 01-16 01-11
2 DSS/DLS MAP – Associate STA STA # STA #
TABLE 1.6.9 STATION ATTRIBUTE I/II/III

111 1 Auto Speaker Selection ON / OFF ON
2 Call Forward ON / OFF ON
3 DND ON / OFF ON
4 Data Line Security ON / OFF OFF
5 Howling Tone to SLT ON / OFF ON
6 ICM Box Signaling ON / OFF OFF
7 No Touch Answer ON / OFF ON
8 Page Access ON / OFF OFF
9 Ring Type 1-4 1
10 Speaker/Headset Ring SP/HEAD/ BOTH Speaker-Phone
11 Speaker Phone/Headset ON/OFF ON
0 - 2 (LDK-300)
12 VMIB Slot 0
0 - 1 (LDK-100)
01 - 15 (LDK-300)
13 ICM Group 01
01 - 05 (LDK-100)
14 Error Tone for TAD ON / OFF OFF
15 SLT Flash Drop ON / OFF OFF
112 1 CO Warning Tone ON / OFF OFF
2 Automatic Hold ON / OFF OFF STA2:ON
3 CO Call Time Restriction ON / OFF OFF
4 Ind CO Line Access EN/DIS ENABLE
5 CO Line Queuing EN/DIS ENABLE
6 CO PGM EN/DIS DISABLE
7 PLA EN/DIS ENABLE
8 Prepaid Call ON / OFF OFF
9 Speed Dial Access EN/DIS ENABLE
10 Two Way Record ON / OFF OFF
11 Fax Mode ON / OFF OFF
12 OFFNET Call Mode EXT/ALL ALL
13 UCD Grp Service ON / OFF OFF
14 Ring Grp Service ON / OFF OFF
12
Admin Programming

112 15 Stop Camp On Tone ON / OFF OFF
16 Line Length SHORT / SHORT SAF only
LONG / FAR (Short:0km,
Long:0~3km,Far:3~7.5km)
113 1 Admin EN/DIS DISABLE STA100
2 VMIB Access EN/DIS DISABLE Enable
3 Group Listening EN/DIS DISABLE
4 Override Privilege EN/DIS DISABLE
5 SMDR Hidden Dialed Digits EN/DIS DISABLE
6 Voice Over EN/DIS DISABLE
7 Warm Line Hot Line / Warm Line Warm Line
8 DVU MSG Retrieve Password ON/OFF OFF
9 DVU MSG Retrieve Date/Time ON/OFF ON
10 MISB (ON/OFF) OFF
LDK-300 RAU1 (ON/OFF) OFF
Alarm Attribute RAU2 (ON/OFF) OFF
MPB (ON/OFF) OFF
LDK-100
MISB (ON/OFF) OFF
TABLE 1.6.10 ISDN STATION ATTRIBUTE

114 1 CLIP LCD Display ON / OFF ON
2 COLP LCD Display ON / OFF OFF
3 CLI / REDIRECT Display CLI/ CLI
REDIRECT
4 CLI MSG Wait ON / OFF OFF
5 EXT or CO ATD ATD/EXT EXT
6 Keypad Facility KEYPAG/DTMF DTMF
7 Long/Short LONG/SHORT SHORT
8 CPN Type 0-2 0(Not used)
9 S0 Sub-address 0-2 0(Not used)
10 Reserved - -
11 CLI Name Display ON/OFF OFF
12 ISDN CLI Station Number Max 4 digits Logical STA Number
13 Progress Indication ON / OFF OFF
14 ISDN CLIR ON / OFF OFF
15 ISDN COLR ON / OFF OFF
16 DID Restriction ON / OFF OFF
17 DID Call Wait ON/OFF OFF
13
Admin Programming
TABLE 1.6.11 FLEXIBLE BUTTON ASSIGNMENT

115 01-44 Flex. Buttons Assignment BTN 01-44
1: User Button - Not programmed
2: {CO} Button 001-200 (LDK-300)
01-40 (LDK-100)
3: {CO Group} Button 01-72 (LDK-300)
01-24 (LDK-100)
4: {LOOP} Button -
5: {STA xxx} Button STA No.
6: STA PGM Button 11 - 99
7: {STA SPD xxx} Button STA SPD Bin No.
8: {SYS SPD xxxx} Button SYS SPD Bin No.
9: Num Pln Button Num Plan Code
TABLE 1.6.12 STATION BASE PROGRAM

116 1 Station COS : Day 1-7 1
2 Station COS : Night 1-7 1
117 CO Group Access
1 CO Line Group 01~24 01-24
2 CO Line Group 25~48 25-48 LDK-300 Only
3 CO Line Group 49~72 49-72 LDK-300 Only
118 Internal Page Zone Access GRP 01
1 Internal Page Zone 01~24 LDK-100 : 01-10
2 Internal Page Zone 25~30 LDK-300 Only
119 1-5 Conference Page Zone Access 31 - 35 (LDK-300)
11 - 15 (LDK-100)
120 ICM Tenancy Group number
1 ICM Tenancy Group Attendant STA No. -
2 ICM Tenancy Access Group 01 - 15 (LDK-300) -
01 - 05 (LDK-100)
121 Preset Call Forward -
122 Hot Line / Warm Line -
1: Flex Button 01 – 44 -
2: CO Line 001-200 (LDK-300) -
01-40 (LDK-100)
3: CO Group 01-72 (LDK-300) -
01-24 (LDK-100)
4: Station STA No. -
123 1 CTI Mode 0–2 1 0: Inactive
1: CTI mode
2: AT mode
2 CTI Baud Rate 0–2 0 0: 1200
1: 2400
2: 4800
124 SMDR Account Group Assign 00 – 99(LDK-300) 00(Not Assigned)
00 – 23(LDK-100)
14
Admin Programming
TABLE 1.6.13 CO LINE BASE PROGRAM

140 CO Service Type
1 CO Type 1-5 1(Normal) 1:Normal, 2:A_DID,
3:ISDN DID/MSN, 4: TIE,
5: DCO DID
2 Detailed Attribute of the type
DISA(D/N/W) Day / Night / Weekend
DISA SVC ON /OFF OFF
VMIB ANNC 00-70 00(NOT_ASG)
Analog DID
SIGNAL 1-3 1 1: Immediate 2: Wink
3: Delayed Dial
INFO NO 00-70 00(NOT_ASG)
TIE Attribute
TIE SIG 1-5 1 1:RD 2:LD 3:EM-C 4:EM-D
5:EM-I
141 CO Line Attributes –I 1-9
1 CO Line Group Assignment 00-73 (LDK-300) 01
00-25 (LDK-100)
2 CO Line COS 1-5 1
3 DISA Account Code ON / OFF OFF
4 CO Line Assign POL/LOOP LOOP Polarity RV, Loop Start
5 CO Line Type PBX/CO CO
6 CO Line Signal Type DTMF/PULSE DTMF
7 Flash Type GROUND/LOOP LOOP
8 UNA ON / OFF OFF
9 CO Line Group Account ON / OFF OFF
10 Tenancy Group 00-15 (LDK-300) 01
00-05 (LDK-100)
142 CO Line Attributes – II 1-13
1 CO Line Name Display ON / OFF OFF
2 CO Line Name Assign - Max 12 characters
3 Metering Unit 00-06 0
4 Line Drop using CPT ON / OFF OFF
5 CO Distinct Ring 0-4 0
6 CO Line MOH 0-13 (LDK-300) 1
0-12 (LDK-100)
7 PABX CO Dial Tone YES / NO YES
8 PABX CO Ring Back Tone YES / NO NO
9 PABX CO Error Tone YES / NO NO
10 PABX CO Busy Tone YES / NO NO
11 PABX CO Announce Tone YES / NO NO
12 CO Flash Timer 000 – 300 050 10 msec base
13 Open Loop Detect Timer 0 – 20 0 100 msec base
14 Line Length LONG / SHORT SHORT SAF only
(Short:0~2km, Long:2~9Km)
15
Admin Programming

143 ISDN CO Line Attribute 1-6
1 COLP Table Index 00 ~ 50 None 00 ~ 49: PGM 201 Bin No.
50: PGM 114-BTN 5
2 CLIP Table Index 00 ~ 50 None 00 ~ 49: PGM 201 Bin No.
50: PGM 114-BTN 5
3 Type of Calling Number 0-4 2 0:Unknown number
1:International type
2:National number
3:Not used
4:Subscriber number
4 DID Conversion Type 0~2 0
5 DID Removal Number 00-99 00 00:Do not ignore
01-99:indicate an ignored
called party number
(DID_RN : DID Remove
number from called party
information)
6 ISDN Enblock Sending ON / OFF OFF ON:Enblock Sending Mode
OFF:Overlap Sending Mode
7 CLI Transit ORI(1)/CFW(0) CFW(0) ORI : Send CLI as the
originate caller’s CLI.
CFW : Send CLI as the call
forwarded station’s CLI.
144 CO Ring Assignment STA Range (Delay : 0 – 9),
1 Day STA_R/ HUNT/VMIB Hunt Group, VMIB Message
2 Night STA_R/ HUNT/VMIB
3 Weekend STA_R/ HUNT/VMIB
4 On-demand STA_R/ HUNT/VMIB
145 CO Ring Assignment
Display
1 Day STA_R/ HUNT/VMIB
2 Night STA_R/ HUNT/VMIB
3 Weekend STA_R/ HUNT/VMIB
4 On-demand STA_R/ HUNT/VMIB
16
Admin Programming
TABLE 1.6.14 SYSTEM BASE PROGRAM

160 System Attributes-I 1-13
1 Attendant Call Queuing RB RBT/MOH MOH RBT:Ring Back Tone
MOH:PGM171 - 2
2 CAMP RBT/MOH RBT/MOH MOH
3 CO Line Choice LAST/ROUND LAST Round-Robin,
Last Choice
4 DISA Retry Counter 1-9 3
5 ICM Continuous Dial-Tone CONT / DISCONT CONT Continuous,
Discontinuous
6 CO Dial-Tone Detect ON / OFF OFF
7 External Night Ring ON / OFF OFF
8 Hold Preference SYS/EXEC SYS System, Exclusive
9 Multi-line Conference ON / OFF ON
10 Print LCR Conversion Digit ON / OFF OFF
11 Conference Warning Tone ON / OFF ON
12 Offnet Prompt Usage ON / OFF ON
13 Offnet DTMF Tone ON / OFF ON
161 System Attributes-II 1-13
1 Network Time/Date Setting ON / OFF OFF
2 Off-Hook Ring Signal Type MUTE/BURST MUTE Mute Ring,One Burst
3 Override 1st CO Group ON / OFF ON
4 Page Warning Tone ON / OFF ON
5 Privacy ON / OFF ON
6 Privacy Warning Tone ON / OFF ON
7 Single Ring for CO Call YES/NO NO
8 WTU Auto Release ON / OFF OFF
9 ACD PRNT Enable ON / OFF OFF ON:10s
10 ACD PRNT Timer 001 – 255 001 10 sec or 1 hour base
11 ACD Clr After Print ON / OFF OFF
12 VMIB PROMPT GAIN 00 - 31 08
13 New VM Type Set ON / OFF OFF
14 ACD Print Timer Unit HOUR/SEC SEC SEC: 10 seconds
162 - Admin Password 4 Digits -
163 1 Alarm Enable ON / OFF OFF
2 Alarm Contact Type CLOSE/OPEN CLOSE Close, Open
3 Alarm Mode ALARM / BELL ALARM Alarm, Door Bell
4 Alarm Signal Mode RPT/ONCE RPT Repeat , Once
164 1-5 Attendant Assignment STA No. 1 : 101 Max 5 Atds
165 - Auto Attendant
1 Auto Attendant Usage ON / OFF OFF
2 Auto Attendant VMIB Annc.# 00-70 00(not_asgn)
166 CO-to-CO COS 1-7 1
1 Day COS 1-7 1
2 Night/Weekend COS 1-7 1
17
Admin Programming

167 DID/DISA Destination F1-F4
1 Busy Destination F1-F3 F1 1: Tone
2 Error Destination F1-F3 F1 2: ATD (Ring Assign)
3 No Answer Destination F1-F3 F1 3: FWD to Hunt Grp.
4 VMIB PROMPT USAGE F1-F5
1 Busy Prompt Usage ON / OFF ON
2 Error Prompt Usage ON / OFF ON
3 DND Prompt Usage ON / OFF ON
4 No Ans Prompt Usage ON / OFF ON
5 Atd Xfer Prompt Usage ON / OFF ON
168 1 First Contact 1-5 - 1: LBC(STA #)
2: Door
3: Ext. 1
4: Ext. 2
5: Ext. 3
2 Second Contact 1-5 -
3 Third Contact 1-5 -
4 Forth Contact 1-5 -
5 Fifth Contact 1-5 -
6 Sixth Contact 1-5 -
7 Seventh Contact 1-5 - LDK-300 Only
169 1 Time Display Mode 12H/ 24H 12H
2 Date Display Mode MMDD / DDMM DDMMYY
3 Language Display Mode 00-14 12(Korean) 0:ENGLISH,
1:ITALIAN,
2:FINNISH,
3:DUTCH,
4:SWEDISH,
5:DANISH,
6:NORWEGIAN,
7:HEBREW,
8:GERMANY,
9:FRENCH,
10:PORTUGUESE,
11:SPANISH,
12:KOREAN,
13:ESTONIA,
14:RUSSIAN,
170 Modem Associated Device STA 399 (LDK-300)
Last Station
STA 227 (LDK-100)
1 Associated Station Station Number
2 Associated CO CO Number
18
Admin Programming

171 1 BGM Type 0-12 (LDK-300) 1 0: None
0-11 (LDK-100) 1: Int. Music
2-4: Ext. Music 1-3
5-6(7): VMIB 1-2(3)
7(8)-11(12): SLT MOH
2 MOH Type 0-13 (LDK-300) 1 0: NOT_ASG
0-12 (LDK-100) 1: Int. Music
2-4: Ext. Music 1-3
5-6(7): VMIB 1-2(3)
7(8)-11(12): SLT MOH
12(13): Hold Tone
3 ICM Box Music Channel 0-12 (LDK-300) 1 The same as above 1
0-11 (LDK-100)
4 Assign MOH via SLT Flex. 1-5 - SLT MOH 1-5
(+SLT STA No.)
172 1 - 4 PBX Access Code Max. 2 digits - Maximum 4
PBX access code
173 PLA Priority Setting PLA priority is set
Exclusively
1 Transfer CO 1–4 1
2 Recalling CO 1–4 2
3 Incoming CO 1–4 3
4 Queued CO 1–4 4
174 RS-232 PORT Setting
1 Baud Rate Setting 0-8 19200(6) 0: UNKNOWN
1: UNKNOWN
2: 1200 BAUD
3: 2400 BAUD
4: 4800 BAUD
5: 9600 BAUD
6: 19200 BAUD
7: 38400 BAUD
8: 57600 BAUD
2 CTS ON / OFF OFF
3 Page Break ON / OFF OFF
4 Line Page 001-199 060
19
Admin Programming

175 1 Off-line SMDR/Statistics Print
2 Admin Print
COM2(02) :
3 Traffic Print
LDK-300
4 SMDI Print Value : 1-8 : LDK-300
5 CALL Info Print Value : 1-6 : LDK-100
COM1(01) :
6 On-line SMDR Print LDK-100
7 Trace Print
8 Debug Print 01-13 (LDK-300)
01-11 (LDK-100)
9 PC_ADM NET_PCADM LDK-300 : 1-5, 9, 10
LDK-100 : 1-3, 7, 8
10 PC_ATD NET_PCATD LDK-300 : 1, 2, 4, 5, 11
LDK-100 : 1, 2, 4, 9
11 CTI NET_CTI LDK-300 : 1, 2, 4, 5, 12
LDK-100 : 1, 2, 4, 10
12 REMOTE_DIAG NET_REMOTE LDK-300 : 1-5, 13
LDK-100 : 1-3, 11
176 - Pulse Dial/Speed Ratio 66/33 / 66/33 66/33
60/40 60/40(10 PPS only)
177 SMDR Attributes 1-14
1 SMDR Save Enable ON / OFF OFF
2 SMDR Print Enable ON / OFF OFF
3 SMDR Recording Call Type LD / ALL LD LD : Long Distance
ALL: All
4 SMDR Long Distance Call Digit 07-15 07 Considered more than
Counter this value as Long
Distance Call.
5 Print Incoming Call ON / OFF OFF
6 Print Lost Call ON / OFF OFF
7 Records in Detail ON / OFF ON
8 SMDR Dial Digit Hidden 0-9 0
9 SMDR Currency 3 English Chars -
10 SMDR Cost Per Unit Pulse 6 digits -
11 SMDR Fraction 0-5 0
12 SMDR Start Timer 0 – 250 0 1 sec base
13 SMDR Hidden Digit Right/Left Right
14 SMDR Long Distance Codes MAX 2 digits 0 Max. 5 LD codes
178 1 System Time Setting 4 digits - Hour/Min sequence
2 System Date Setting 6 digits - Month/Day/Year
sequence.
179 1 View Show the linked pairs
2 Linked Pair Input 2 STA# Max: 64 pairs
20
Admin Programming
TABLE 1.6.15 SYSTEM TIMER PROGRAM

180 1 Attendant Recall Timer 00 - 60 01 1 min base
2 Call Park Recall Timer 000 - 600 120 1 sec base
3 Camp-on Recall Timer 000 - 200 030 1 sec base
4 Exclusive Hold Recall Timer 000 - 300 060 1 sec base
5 I-Hold Recall Timer 000 - 300 030 1 sec base
6 Sys Hold Recall Timer 000 - 300 030 1 sec base
7 Transfer Recall Timer 000 - 300 030 1 sec base
8 ACNR Delay Timer 000 - 300 030 1 sec base
9 ACNR No Answer Timer 10 - 50 30 1 sec base
10 ACNR Pause Timer 005 - 300 030 1 sec base
11 ACNR Retry Counter 01 - 30 3
12 ACNR No Tone Retry Counter 1-9 1
13 ACNR Tone Detect Timer 001-300 030 1 sec base
14 Automatic CO Release Timer. 020 - 300 030 1 sec base
15 CCR Inter-Digit Timer 000 - 255 030 100 msec base
16 CO Call Drop Warning Timer 00 - 99 10 1 sec base
17 CO Call Restriction Timer 00 - 99 0 1 min base
18 CO Dial Delay Timer 00 - 99 01 100 msec base
19 CO Release Guard Timer 001 - 150 020 100 msec base
20 CO Ring Off Timer 010 - 150 060 100 msec base
21 CO Ring On Timer 1-9 2 100 msec base
22 CO Warning Tone Timer 060 - 900 180 1 sec base
181 1 Call FWD No Answer Timer 000 - 255 015 1 sec base
2 DID/DISA No Answer Timer 00 - 99 20 1 sec base
3 VMIB User Record Timer 010 - 255 020 1 sec base
4 VMIB Valid User Message Timer 0-9 4 1 sec base
5 Door Open Timer 05 - 99 20 100msec base
6 ICM Box Timer 00 - 60 30 1 sec base
7 ICM Dial Tone Timer 01 - 20 10 1 sec base
8 Inter Digit Timer 01 - 20 05 1 sec base
9 MSG Wait Reminder Tone Timer 00 - 60 00 1 min base
10 Paging Timeout Timer 000 - 255 015 1 sec base
11 Pause Timer 1-9 3 1 sec base
12 Preset Call Forward Timer 00 - 99 10 1 sec base
182 1 SLT Hook Switch Bounce Timer 01 - 25 01 100msec base
2 SLT Maximum Hook Flash Timer 01-25 05 100msec base
3 SLT Minimum Hook Flash Timer 000 - 250 020 10msec base
4 SLT Ring Phase Timer 2-5 5 1 sec base
5 Station Auto Release Timer 020 - 300 060 1 sec base
6 Unsupervised Conference Timer 00 - 99 10 1 min base
7 Wake-Up Fail Ring Timer 00 - 99 20 1 sec base
8 Warm Line Timer 01 - 20 05 1 sec base
9 Wink Timer 010 - 200 010 10msec base
10 Enblock Digit timer 01-20 15 1 sec base
11 CCR Time Out Timer 000-300 015 1 sec base
12 DID Inter Digit Timer 01-20 03 1 sec base
21
Admin Programming

185 CIDU Setting
1 CID Usage ON / OFF OFF
2 CID Name Display Name(1) / Telephone No.(0)
Telephone No.(0)
3 Serial Port Select 1-4 -
4 CID/CO Line Port Mapping 000-063 -
5 Initialize CID Data
TABLE 1.6.16 DCOB ATTRIBUTE

186 DCOB System Attributes 1-12
1 DCOB CO Type 0-2 2 0:Sweden/Cyprus
1:Italy
2:Korea/Australia
2 Metering Type 0-1 0
3 R2 OUT Manage Timer 01-50 14 1 sec
4 R2 IN Manage Timer 01-50 14 1 sec
5 R2 Disappear Timer 01-50 14 1 sec
6 R2 Pulse Timer 01-30 7 20 msec
7 R2 Ready Timer 000-500 7 20 msec
8 Dial Tone Delay Timer 01-30 20
9 Line Status 1-9 6 Free Line
10 Calling Category 1-9 1 User no priority
11 DNIS Service ON/OFF OFF
12 CLI Digit Num 01-10 4 Reserved
187 DCOB CO Line Attributes CO Line range
1 IN Digit Type 0-2 2 0:PULSE 1:DTMF
2 OUT Digit Type 0-2 2 2:R2MFC
3 CLI Digit Num 01-15 10
TABLE 1.6.17 STATION GROUP ASSIGNMENT

190 Station Group Number STA Grp # -
1 Group Type 0-6 0 0: Not Assign
1: Circular
2: Terminal
3: UCD
4: Ring
5: VM
6: Pick up
2 Pick-up Attribute ON/OFF OFF
3 Member Assignment Not Assigned - Group type should be assigned
22
Admin Programming
TABLE 1.6.18 STATION GROUP PROGRAM
PGM ITEM BTN SUB ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

191 Circular 1 VMIB Announce 1 Timer 000-999 015 1 sec base
Group 2 VMIB Announce 2 Timer 000-999 000 1 sec base
3 VMIB Announce Location 1 00-70 00(not_asgn)
5 VMIB Announce 2 Repeat 000-999 000 1 sec base
6 VMIB Announce 2 Repeat E/D ON / OFF OFF
7 Overflow Destination STA #/HUNT#/ -
VMIB #/SYS SPD#
8 Overflow Timer 000-600 180 1 sec base
9 Wrap-up Timer 002-999 002 1 sec base
10 No Answer Timer 00-99 15 1 sec base
11 Pilot Hunt ON / OFF ON
12 Alt If No Member ON / OFF OFF
13 Music Source 00 - 12 (LDK-300) 00
00 - 11 (LDK-100)
Terminal 1 VMIB Announce 1 Timer 000-999 015 1 sec base
Group
2 VMIB Announce 2 Timer 000-999 000 1 sec base
6 VMIB Announce 2 Repeat E/D ON / OFF OFF
VMIB #/SYS SPD#
9 Wrap-up Timer 002-999 002 1 sec base
10 No Answer Timer 00-99 15 1 sec base
11 Pilot Hunt ON / OFF ON
13 Music Source 00 - 12 (LDK-300) 00
00 - 11 (LDK-100)
23
Admin Programming
PGM ITEM BTN SUB ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

191 UCD Group 1 VMIB Announce 1 Timer 000-999 015 1 sec base
6 VMIB Announce 2 Repeat ON / OFF OFF
E/D
VMIB #/SYS SPD#
9 Wrap Up Timer 002-999 002 1 sec base
11 Music Source 00 - 12 (LDK-300) 00
00 - 11 (LDK-100)
12 ACD Warning Tone ON / OFF ON
13 Alternate Destination STA #/STA GRP#
14 Supervisor Timer 000-999 030 1 sec base
15 Supervisor Call Count 00-99 00
16 ACD Queued Call ON / OFF OFF
17 MAX Que Call Count 00-99 00
18 Supervisor STA # -
19 UCD hunt Stations' Priority 0-9 0 For each
member
Ring Group 1 VMIB Announce 1 Timer 000-999 015 1 sec base
6 VMIB Announce 2 Repeat ON / OFF OFF
E/D
VMIB #/SYS SPD#
9 Wrap Up Timer 002-999 002 1 sec base
10 Music Source 00 - 12 (LDK-300) 00
00 - 11 (LDK-100)
11 Max. Queued Call Count 00-99 00
VM Group 1 Wrap-up Timer 002-999 002 1 sec base
2 Put Mail Index 1-4 1
3 Get Mail Index 1-4 2
4 Hunt Type Cir/Term Term
5 SMDI Port 01-13 (LDK-300) 02(COM2)
01-11 (LDK-100) 01(COM1)
VMIB #/SYS SPD#
Pick-up 1 Auto Pick-up ON / OFF OFF
Group 2 All Group Member Ringing ON / OFF OFF
24
Admin Programming
TABLE 1.6.19 ISDN ATTRIBUTES

200 1 Advice of Charge 0-6 0 0: Do not service AOC
1: Italy and Spain
2: Finland
3: Australia
4: Belgium
5: Standard
6: Netherlands
2 CO ATD Code Max 2 digits -
3 Incoming Prefix Code Insertion ON / OFF OFF
4 Outgoing Prefix Code Insertion ON / OFF ON
5 A/u-Law Line Installed U/A A-Law ON: u-Law
OFF: A-Law
6 CLI Print ON/OFF OFF
7 International Access Code Max 4 digits -
8 Calling Sub-address ON/OFF OFF If this field is ON, station
number will be filled in
calling party number sub-
address IE in setup.
9 My Area Code Max 6 digits -
10 My Area Prefix Code Max 4 digits -
201 - COLP Table Entry No. - Max 10 digits
(00-49)
202 - MSN Table Entry No. -
(000-249)
1 CO Line number 001-200 (LDK-300) -
01-40 (LDK-100)
2 Index 000-999 -
3 SUB Number 0-9 -
4 MSN number 20 digits -
25
Admin Programming
TABLE 1.6.20 LCR TABLE ASSIGNMENT

220 1 LCR Access Mode M00/M01/M02/M11/M12/M13 M00
2 Set the Day of week zone 1234567
1 MON 1–3 1
2 TUE 1–3 1
3 WED 1–3 1
4 THUR 1–3 1
5 FRI 1–3 1
6 SAT 1–3 1
7 SUN 1–3 1
3 Set the Time Zone of Day zone 1
1 Time Zone1 00 – 24 0024
2 Time Zone2 00 – 24 -
3 Time Zone3 00 – 24 -
1 Time Zone1 00 – 24 0024
2 Time Zone2 00 – 24 -
3 Time Zone3 00 – 24 -
1 Time Zone1 00 – 24 0024
2 Time Zone2 00 – 24 -
3 Time Zone3 00 – 24 -
221 Leading Digit Table 000-249
1 LCR Type 1–3 3 1:int 2:col
3: both
2 Code (leading digit) Max 12 digits -
3 Day Zone 1 DMT 6digits Time1: 2digit
222 Digit Modification Table 00-99
1 Added Digit Max 25 digits
2 Removal Position 1 – 12 1
3 Number Of Remove 1 – 12 0
4 Add Position 1 – 13 1
5 CO Group 1 – 72 (LDK-300) 1
1 – 24 (LDK-100)
6 Alt Index 0 – 99 -
223 LCR Table Initialization
1 DMT Of Day_zone_1 6 digits Time1: 2digit
4 CO Grp Init 1 – 72 (LDK-300)
1 – 24 (LDK-100)
5 Alt Index Init 0 - 99
6 Init All LCR
26
Admin Programming
TABLE 1.6.21 TOLL TABLE ASSIGNMENT

224 Toll Table
1 Allow Table A (01-30) Max 14 digits -
2 Deny Table A (01-30) Max 14 digits -
3 Allow Table B (01-30) Max 14 digits -
4 Deny Table B (01-30) Max 14 digits -
225 Canned Toll Table
1 Allow Table (01-20) Max 14 digits -
2 Deny Table (01-20) Max 14 digits -
226 Emergency Code Table (01-10) Max 14 digits
TABLE 1.6.22 OTHER TABLES

227 Author Code Table 001 - 600 (LDK-300)
001 - 164 (LDK-100)
Table entry (001-600) Max 5 digits
228 CCR Table 1-70
1 Station STA # -
2 Hunt Group HUNT # -
3 VMIB Announce # -
4 VMIB Drop Announce #
5 System Speed 2000-4999 (LDK-300) -
2000-3499 (LDK-100)
6 Internal Page 1 - 30 (LDK-300) -
1 - 10 (LDK-100)
7 External Page 1–3 -
8 All Call Page 1–3 - 1:INT 2:EXT 3:All
229 Exec/Sec Table 01-36 (LDK-300)
01-12 (LDK-100)
Table entry(01-36) STA #/STA #
230 DID Digit Conversion Table
1 Receive Number 2–4 3
2 Dgt Mask Max 5 digits #***
231 - Flexible DID Table Entry No.(000-999) -
1 DID Name Max 11 chars. -
2 Day Destination 1-9 - 1(sta), 2(hunt), 3(VMIB)
3 Night Destination 1-9 - 4(VMIB drop), 5(spd),
4 Weekend Destination 1-9 - 6(int. page), 7(ext. page)
5 Reroute Destination 1-6 - 8(all page), 9(net call)
232 System Speed Zone 01-10
1 Speed Bin Range in Zone 2200-4999 (LDK-300) -
2200-3499 (LDK-100)
2 Station Range Station Range -
3 Toll Checking On/Off ON
27
Admin Programming

233 Weekly Time Table 1–7 - Day of Week
1 Day Start Time 0000 – 2359 0900
2 Night Start Time 0000 – 2359 1800
3 Weekend Start Time 0000 – 2359
234 Voice Mail Dial-Table 1-9
1 Prefix Index 12 Digits -
2 Suffix Index 12 Digits -
235 TIE Line Routing Table CO number -
TABLE 1.6.23 NETWORKING ATTRIBUTE

320 Networking Basic Attributes F1-F7
1 Networking Enable ON / OFF OFF
2 Networking Retry Count 00 – 99 00
3 Networking CNIP Enable ON / OFF OFF
4 Networking CONP Enable ON / OFF OFF
5 Networking Signal Method FAC / UUS UUS
6 Networking CAS Enable ON / OFF OFF
7 Networking VPN Enable ON / OFF OFF
321 Supplementary Attributes F1-F7
1 Networking Transfer Mode RERT / JOIN JOIN
2 TCP port 4 digits 9000
3 UDP port 4 digits 9001
4 Gatekeeper IP Address 12 digits 0.0.0.0
5 Duration of BLF status 01 ~ 20 sec 02
6 Multicast IP Address 12 digits 0.0.0.0
7 Net Trans Recall Timer 1 ~ 300 10
322 Networking CO Line Attributes CO Line range
1 Networking CO Group 00 – 24 00
2 Networking CO Out Send ON / OFF OFF
3 Networking CO Out Trans ON / OFF OFF
323 CAS/VPN CO Group Assign F1-F3
1 CAS Number Table Index 00-71 00
2 VPN CO Group 00-71 00
3 CAS Prefix Code 8 digits -
324 Networking Routing Table 00-71
1 Numbering Plan Code 16 digits -
2 Numbering Plan CO Group 00-24 -
3 System Usage VOIP(1) / QSIG(0) QSIG(0)
4 CPN Information 16 digits -
5 Alternate Speed Bin 2000-4999 -
6 MPB LAN IP Address IP address -
28
Admin Programming
TABLE 1.6.24 VOIB NET ATTRUBUTE

340 VOIB IP SETTING F1-F3 (LDK-300)
F1-F2 (LDK-100)
VOIB NET SETTING F1-F5
1 IP Addressing(SKIP:#)
2 GATEWAY Addressing (SKIP:#)
3 SUBNET Mask(SKIP:#)
4 DNS Addressing (SKIP:#)
5 TRACE Password Max 10 Digits
6 Default CODEC 1–4 1
7 Default GAIN 1 - 62 31
8 NO Delay (TOS) ON / OFF OFF
9 Throughput (TOS) HIGH / NORMAL NORMAL
10 Reliability (TOS) HIGH / NORMAL NORMAL
TABLE 1.6.25 NATION SPECIFIC
PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

400 DTIB RX Gain Korean version
1 DTIB/DKT 00 – 63 26
2 DTIB/SLT 00 – 63 33
3 DTIB/CTR SL 00 – 63 22
4 DTIB/WTU 00 – 63 26
5 DTIB/ACO 00 – 63 33
6 DTIB/CTR CO 00 – 63 22
7 DTIB/DCO 00 – 63 33
8 DTIB/VMIB 00 – 63 29
9 DTIB/DTMF 00 – 63 8
10 DTIB/TONE 00 – 63 32
11 DTIB/MUSIC1 00 – 63 29
12 DTIB/MUSIC2 00 – 63 29
13 DTIB/MUSIC3 00 – 63 29
401 SLIB RX Gain
1 SLIB/DKT 00 – 63 12
2 SLIB/SLT 00 – 63 23 LDK-100 : Default 27
3 SLIB/CTR SL 00 – 63 12 LDK-100 : Default 16
4 SLIB/WTU 00 – 63 12
5 SLIB/ACO 00 – 63 21
6 SLIB/CTR CO 00 – 63 12
7 SLIB/DCO 00 – 63 24
8 SLIB/VMIB 00 – 63 20
9 SLIB/DTMF 00 – 63 8
10 SLIB/TONE 00 – 63 18
11 SLIB/MUSIC1 00 – 63 20
12 SLIB/MUSIC2 00 – 63 20
13 SLIB/MUSIC3 00 – 63 20
29
Admin Programming

402 CTR SLIB RX Gain
1 CTRSL2/DKT 00 – 63 32
2 CTRSL2/SLT 00 – 63 43 LDK-100 : Default 47
3 CTRSL2/ CTR SL 00 – 63 32 LDK-100 : Default 36
4 CTRSL2/WTU 00 – 63 32
5 CTRSL2/ACO 00 – 63 41
6 CTRSL2/ATR CO 00 – 63 32
7 CTRSL2/DCO 00 – 63 44
8 CTRSL2/VMIB 00 – 63 40
9 CTRSL2/DTMF 00 – 63 28
10 CTRSL2/TONE 00 – 63 38
11 CTRSL2/MUSIC1 00 – 63 40
12 CTRSL2/MUSIC2 00 – 63 40
13 CTRSL2/MUSIC3 00 – 63 40
403 WTIB RX Gain
1 WTIB/DKT 00 – 63 26
2 WTIB/SLT 00 – 63 33
3 WTIB/CTR SL 00 – 63 22
4 WTIB/WTU 00 – 63 26
5 WTIB/ACO 00 – 63 38
6 WTIB/CTR CO 00 – 63 29
7 WTIB/DCO 00 – 63 33
8 WTIB/VMIB 00 – 63 29
9 WTIB/DTMF 00 – 63 8
10 WTIB/TONE 00 – 63 37
11 WTIB/MUSIC1 00 – 63 29
12 WTIB/MUSIC2 00 – 63 29
13 WTIB/MUSIC3 00 – 63 29
404 ACOB RX Gain
1 ACOB/DKT 00 – 63 26
2 ACOB/SLT 00 – 63 37
3 ACOB/CTR SL 00 – 63 27
4 ACOB/WTU 00 – 63 26
5 ACOB/ACO 00 – 63 36
6 ACOB/STR CO 00 – 63 27
7 ACOB/DCO 00 – 63 33
8 ACOB/VMIB 00 – 63 32
9 ACOB/DTMF 00 – 63 32
10 ACOB/TONE 00 – 63 32
11 ACOB/MUSIC1 00 – 63 32
12 ACOB/MUSIC2 00 – 63 32
13 ACOB/MUSIC3 00 – 63 32
14 ACOB/MODEM 00 – 63 37
30
Admin Programming

405 CTR ACOB RX Gain
1 CTRCO8/DKT 00 – 63 28
2 CTRCO8/SLT 00 – 63 43
3 CTRCO8/CTR SL 00 – 63 32
4 CTRCO8/WTU 00 – 63 31
5 CTRCO8/ACO 00 – 63 41
6 CTRCO8/CTR CO 00 – 63 32
7 CTRCO8/DCO 00 – 63 38
8 CTRCO8/VMIB 00 – 63 37
9 CTRCO8/DTMF 00 – 63 37
10 CTRCO8/TONE 00 – 63 37
11 CTRCO8/MUSIC1 00 – 63 37
12 CTRCO8/MUSIC2 00 – 63 37
13 CTRCO8/MUSIC3 00 – 63 37
14 CTRCO8/MODEM 00 – 63 44
406 DCOB RX Gain
1 DCOB/DKT 00 – 63 26
2 DCOB/SLT 00 – 63 37
3 DCOB/CTR SL 00 – 63 26
4 DCOB/WTU 00 – 63 26
5 DCOB/ACO 00 – 63 24
6 DCOB/CTR CO 00 – 63 15
7 DCOB/DCO 00 – 63 32
8 DCOB/VMIB 00 – 63 32
9 DCOB/DTMF 00 – 63 32
10 DCOB/TONE 00 – 63 32
11 DCOB/MUSIC1 00 – 63 32
12 DCOB/MUSIC2 00 – 63 32
13 DCOB/MUSIC3 00 – 63 32
14 DCOB/MODEM 00 – 63 37
407 VMIB RX Gain
1 VMIB/DKT 00 – 63 21
2 VMIB/SLT 00 – 63 32
3 VMIB/CTR SL 00 – 63 21
4 VMIB/WTU 00 – 63 26
5 VMIB/ACO 00 – 63 32
6 VMIB/CTR CO 00 – 63 23
7 VMIB/DCO 00 – 63 32
8 VMIB/MUSIC1 00 – 63 32
9 VMIB/MUSIC2 00 – 63 32
408 DTMF RC Gain
1 DTMF/SLT 00 – 63 28
2 DTMF/CTR SL 00 – 63 17
3 DTMF/ACO 00 – 63 24
4 DTMF/CTR CO 00 – 63 15
5 DTMF/DCO 00 – 63 24
31
Admin Programming

409 EXT PAGE Gain
1 EXT PAGE/DKT 00 – 63 26
2 EXT PAGE/SLT 00 – 63 37
3 EXT PAGE/CTR SL 00 – 63 26
4 EXT PAGE/WTU 00 – 63 26
5 EXT PAGE/ACO 00 – 63 37
6 EXT PAGE/CTR CO 00 – 63 28
7 EXT PAGE/DCO 00 – 63 37
8 EXT PAGE/VMIB 00 – 63 37
9 EXT PAGE/MUSIC1 00 – 63 37
410 CPT Gain
1 CPT/ACO 00 – 63 24
2 CPT/CTR CO 00 – 63 15
3 CPT/DCO 00 – 63 24
411 MODEM Gain
1 MODEM/ACO 00 – 63 24
2 MODEM/CTR CO 00 – 63 20
3 MODEM/DCO 00 – 63 24
412 Short SLIB Gain
1 Shot ACO 00 – 63 31 SAF only
2 Long ACO 00 – 63 31
413 Long SLIB Gain
2 Long ACO 00 – 63 37
414 Far SLIB Gain
2 Long ACO 00 – 63 45
415 Short ACO Gain
1 Short SLIB 00 – 63 35
SAF only
2 Long SLIB 00 – 63 41
3 Far SLIB 00 – 63 47
416 Long ACO Gain
1 Short SLIB 00 – 63 39
SAF only
2 Long SLIB 00 – 63 45
3 Far SLIB 00 – 63 51
420 System Tone Frequency
1 Dial Tone 4digits 0425, 0000
2 Ring Back Tone 4digits 0425, 0000
3 Busy Tone 4digits 0425, 0000
4 Error Tone 4digits 0620, 000
5 Dummy Dial Tone 4digits 0350, 440
421 Differential Ring Frequency
1 Ring 1 4digits 1000, 1020
2 Ring 2 4digits 0890, 0910
3 Ring 3 4digits 1260, 1280
4 Ring 4 4digits 0800, 0820
32
Admin Programming

422 Distinct Ring Frequency
1 Ring 1 4digits 0480, 0000
2 Ring 2 4digits 0400, 0000
3 Ring 3 4digits 0620, 0000
4 Ring 4 4digits 0770, 0000
423 ACNR Tone Cadence
1 Ring-Back Tone 0-255 050, 100 20msec base
2 Busy Tone 0-255 025, 025 20msec base
3 Error Tone 0-255 012, 012 20msec base
4 S –Dial Tone 0-255 070, 000 20msec base
TABLE 1.6.26 INITIALIZATION

450 Initialization
1 Flexible Numbering Plan Initialization
2 Station Database Initialization
3 CO Line Database Initialization
4 System Feature Database Initialization
5 Station Group Database Initialization
6 ISDN Tables Database Initialization
7 Reserved Reserved
8 System Timer Database Initialization
9 Toll Table Database Initialization
10 LCR Database Initialization
11 Tables Initialization
12 Flexible Button Program Initialization
13 Networking Database Initialization
14 All Database Initialization
15 System Reset By Software
33
Admin Programming
TABLE 1.6.27 PRINT PROT DATABASE

451 Print Prot Data
1 Flexible Numbering Plan Print
2 Station Database Print STN_R
3 CO Line Database Print CO_R
4 System Feature Database Print
5 Station Group Database Print
6 ISDN Tables Database Print
7 System Timer Database Print
8 Toll Table Database Print
9 LCR Database Print
10 Other Tables Print
11 Nation Specific Database Print
12 Flexible Button Program Print STN_R
13 All Database Print
14 LCD Message Print
00 – 12 Nation specific 00:ENG
01:ITA
02:FIN
03:DUT
04:SWE
05:DAN
1 Language 06:NOR
07:HUN
08:GER
09:FRE
10:POR
11:SPA
12:KOR
0–2 0 0: NORMAL
2 Station Type 1: LG-GAP
2: LARGE
15 Quit Print
34
Admin Programming
2. PRE-PROGRAMMED DATABASE
This section describes the pre-programming of the data. When installed, user must program some
database (Ex. Nationality, Numbering Plan Type, and Slot Assignment) first, otherwise system may
not operate properly.
If you want to change nationality of the system, then use PGM 100. To assign the board in each
rack, proceed PGM 101-102. After assigning rack slot, you must adjust PGM 103, Logical Slot
Assignment. If you want to use the station number range flexibly, you can select a proper numbering
plan type at PGM 104. If you want to change station numbers or feature codes, then use PGM
105~107. If you need more than 4 digits as a station number for VPN or QSIG, use the station prefix
code at PGM 200-BTN 1.
PROCEDURE FOR PRE-PROGRAMMING
(1) Set Nationality (See Section 2.1)

(2) Set DIP switch 8 as ‘ON’, and reset the system (PGM 450–BTN 15). Then slot assignment is
configured.
(3) Set DIP switch 8 as ‘OFF’ to retain current configuration.
(4) Set Rack Slot Assignments (If configuration is not equal to the system default slot assignments,
you must program it manually. See Section 2.2)
(5) Set Logical Slot Assignment. (After Logical Slot assignment or Rack Slot assignment, the system
must be reset manually. See Section 2.4)
(6) Set Numbering Plan Type. (See Section 2.5)
(7) Set Flexible Numbering Plan. (See Section 2.6)
2.1 LOCATION PROGRAM (PGM 100)
PROCEDURE
LOCATION PROGRAM (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 100.

PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-2)
NATION CODE (2) Press Flex. BTN 1~2. (Ex. Press Flex. BTN 1) LCD shows
82 default or saved value of NATION CODE. Enter desired nation
code in the TABLE 2.1.2. To save the changed nation code in
memory, press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
LOCATION PROGRAM (3) Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-2) then system goes to step (1) without updating system memory.
BTN ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

1 Nation Code 82 Max 2 digits
2 Site Name - Max 23 digits (Refer to English Character Set
Table 2.1.3)
TABLE 2.1.1 Location Program (PGM 100)
35
Admin Programming
NATION CODE NATION CODE NATION CODE

America 1 Argentina 54 Australia 61
Bahrain 973 Bangladesh 880 Belgium 32
Bolivia 591 Brazil 55 Brunei 673
Burma 95 Cameroon 237 Chile 56
China (Taiwan) 886 CIS 7 Colombia 57
Costa Rica 506 Cyprus 357 Czech 42
Denmark 45 Ecuador 593 Egypt 20
El Salvador 503 Ethiopia 251 Fiji 679
Finland 358 France 33 Gabon 241
Germany 49 Ghana 233 Greece 30
Guam 671 Guatemala 502 Guyana 592
Haiti 509 Honduras 504 Hong Kong 852
India 91 Indonesia 62 Iran 98
Iraq 964 Ireland 353 Israel 972
Italy 39 Japan 81 Jordan 962
Kenya 254 Korea 82 Kuwait 965
Liberia 231 Libya 218 Luxembourg 352
Malaysia 60 Malta 356 Mexico 52
Monaco 377 Morocco 212 Netherlands 31
New Zealand 64 Nigeria 234 Norway 47
Oman 968 Pakistan 92 Panama 507
P.N.G 675 Paraguay 595 Peru 51
Philippines 63 Portugal 351 Qatar 974
Saudi Arabia 966 Senegal 221 Singapore 65
South Africa 27 Spain 34 Sri Lanka 94
Swaziland 268 Sweden 46 Switzerland 41
TELKOM *27 Thailand 66 Tunisia 216
Turkey 90 U.A.E. 971 United Kingdom 44
Uruguay 598 Venezuela 58 Y.A.R. 967
TABLE 2.1.2 Nation & National Code (PGM 100)
Q – 11 A - 21 D - 31
Z – 12 B - 22 E - 32
. – 13 C - 23 F - 33
1 – 10 2 - 20 3 - 30
G – 41 J - 51 M - 61
H - 42 K - 52 N - 62
I - 43 L - 53 O - 63
4 – 40 5 - 50 6 - 60
P - 71 W - 91
T - 81
R - 72 X - 92
U - 82
S - 73 Y - 93
V - 83
Q - 7* Z - 9#
8 - 80
7 – 70 9 - 90
*1 - Blank
*2 - : 0-00 #
*3 - ,
TABLE 2.1.3 English Character Set
36
Admin Programming
2.2 RACK SLOT ASSIGNMENT (PGM 101)
Rack slot assignment can be performed automatically and manually. If the DIP switch of the manual
board detection is ON, system will detect the installed board type automatically. If the DIP switch is
OFF, the board type code should be entered at each slot. After manual rack slot assignment, user
must reset the system manually. To change the number of WTIB channels, program PGM102(WTIB
port number assign) and reset manually.
PROCEDURE
BOARD ASSIGNMENT (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 101

ENTER SLOT NUMBER
SLOT 01 (F1:ID F2:DEVS) (2) To program the slot assignment, dial 2 digits as a slot number.
ID : DTIB12 DEVS: 12 If the slot is already assigned, related message will be
displayed on the LCD.
SLOT 01 (F1:ID F2:DEVS) (3) To change pre-assigned board, press Flex BTN 1 and dial 2
ID : SLIB6 DEVS: 6 digits as the board type code. Refer to Table 2.2.1 for each
board type code. Then entered board type code will be
SLOT 01 (F1:ID F2:DEVS) Cf.) In case of PRIB, logical port assign is possible. To program a
ID : PRIB DEVS: 30 logical port number, after entering board type code, press BTN
2 and dial 2 digits as logical port number between 01 and
maximum board port capacity. If logical port is not entered,
maximum port will be assigned .(After programming logical port
number, program PGM 103.)
SLOT 01 (F1:ID F2:DEVS) (4) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for saving database
ID : PRIB DEVS: 30 permanently.
BOARD ASSIGNMENT z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
ENTER SLOT NUMBER then system goes to step (1) without updating system memory.
37
Admin Programming
STA CODE COL CODE STA & COL CODE Etc CODE
DTIB12 11 PRIB 31 STIB 51 VMIB 61
DTIB24 12 BRIB 32 MISB 71
SLIB6 13 LCOB4 33
SLIB12 14 LCOB8 34
WTIB 15 DIDB 35
DSIB 18 BWDIDB 36
TLIB 37
EMIB 38
AC15 39
DCOB 40
VOIB 41
NPRIB 42(LDK-
100)
NBRIB(8) 43(LDK-
100)
NBRIB(4) 44(LDK-
100)
CLCOB8 45
RDIB 46
EMIB8 47
TABLE 2.2.1 Board Type Code Table (PGM 101)
38
Admin Programming
2.3 WTIB PORT NUMBER ASSIGNMENT (PGM 102)
This procedure determines the number of registrable wireless terminals. The available number of
wireless terminal is 008-192 for LDK-300 and 08-80(08-40 for 1 rack) for LDK-100, and default value is
008.
PROCEDURE
WTIB PORT NO (008–192) (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 102. In LDK-100, (008-192) will be like (08-
008 (MULTIPLE OF 8) 80). If LDK-100 has only one rack, it will be like (08-40).
(2) Press the number of registrable wireless terminals. The number

should be in the available range, and be the multiple of 8.
WTIB PORT NO (008–192) (3) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
032 (MULTIPLE OF 8) permanently.
2.4 LOGICAL SLOT ASSIGNMENT (PGM 103)
Logical slot assignment can be performed automatically and manually. If the DIP switch of the manual
board detection is ON, system will detect the logical slot assign in sequence as increase order
automatically. If the DIP switch is OFF, the logical slot assignment should be entered at each board
type. After manual logical slot assignment, user must reset the system manually. For the VMIB, it is
impossible to make logical slot assignment. So user must assign the VMIB slot number manually. In
case of WTIB it is detected as one board by logical slot assignment. So you must assign just one slot
number regardless of the number of installed WTIBs.
PROCEDURE
LOGICAL SLOT ASSIGN (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 103

COL STA VMIB
02 03 .. .. .. .. .. .. (2) Press BTN regarding the slot type and dial slot numbers with
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. increasing order for logical slot numbers.
02 03 05 07 .. .. .. .. (3) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for saving database

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. permanently.
z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,

then system goes to step (1) without updating system memory.
BTN ITEM DEFAULT REMARK

1 COL Board - DIP Switch OFF: Manual slot assignment
DIP Switch ON: Automatic slot assignment
2 STA Board - DIP Switch OFF: Manual slot assignment
DIP Switch ON: Automatic slot assignment
3 VMIB - Should be programmed manually
TABLE 2.4.1 Button Configuration for Slot Assignment (PGM 103)
39
Admin Programming
2.5 NUMBERING PLAN TYPE (PGM 104)
PROCEDURE
NUMBERING PLAN (1-8) (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 104.

1
NUMBERING PLAN (1-8) (2) To assign the numbering plan type, press one digit between 1-8.
2
NUMBERING PLAN (1-8) (3) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for saving database
2 permanently.
INTERCOM RANGE
LDK-300 LDK-100
st
As the basic type, the 1 digit of
1 Number Set Type 1 100 – 399 100 – 227 Yes
station number should be 1 – 4.
The station number can be changed
within 799.
4 Number Set Type 4 7700-7999 7700-7827 No
6 Number Set Type 6 10 – 79 10 – 79 No Max Station Ports: 70
7 Number Set Type 7 100 – 299 100 – 227 No Max Station Ports: 200 (LDK-300)
The station number can be changed
within 999.
TABLE 2.5.1 Flexible Numbering Plan (PGM 104)
40
Admin Programming
2.6 FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN (PGM 105)
You can change each station number in this field. Station number of the system can be assigned
flexibly via the system programming. Station Numbering Code length should be in the range of 2 digits
through 4 digits.
PROCEDURE
000 001 002 003 (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 105.

100 101 102 103
000 001 002 003 z Station Number Assign. You will see the 4 station numbers
100 101 102 103 corresponding to the 4 port numbers. Station number length is
in the range of 2 digits through 4 digits. There are two methods
for changing station number.
Dial two station numbers - Range start station number & range
end station number, then LCD shows dialed range value. Press
the [HOLD/SAVE] button, then station numbers changed from
the first station number on current LCD to range end (All LEDs
of BTNs are off.).
Press one of BTN 1-4 (Each BTN 1-4 is assigned to station

number 1- 4 on the current LCD), then LED of pressed Flex
button is steady on. Dial new station number and press the
[HOLD/SAVE] button, or press other Flex button to assign
station number to other station without saving (The LED of
pressed Flex. button is on.).
If you want to delete all station numbers, press the [SPEED]

button and press [HOLD/SAVE] button, then all station
numbers are cleared.
If you want to change next 4 station numbers then press [▼]

button. If you want to change previous 4 station numbers, then
press [▲] button.
000 001 002 003 (2) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for saving database
100 400 102 103 permanently. (Ex: Press Flex. BTN 2, dial 400 and press
[HOLD/SAVE] button.)
41
Admin Programming
2.7 FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN (PGM 106-107)
Feature codes of the system can be assigned flexibly via the system programming. Feature Code
length should be in the range of 1(one) digit through 4 digits. Let's say that a feature code conflict has
occurred in such a case that a feature code string matches with other longer feature code string,
checking from the first digit of the code. For example, features Code 53 and 536 have a feature code
conflict. The system will not allow any feature code conflict.
PROCEDURE
FLEX NUMBERING PLAN A (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 106. You can program the 24 Flex. Numbers.
PRESS FLEX KEY (01-24) Table 2.7.1 illustrates the programmable list of the 24 flexible
Numbering plan used by PGM 106 and Table 2.7.2 illustrates
the list for PGM 107.
STA GRP PILOT NUMBER (2) To change a numbering plan, press the related flexible button.
START & END #(620-667) Each code length is in 1~4 digits.(To enter station range, 2 ~ 8
digits) For example, press Flex. BTN 1 to change Station Group
pilot number. In LDK-100, the LCD display will be different with
the left. see below table for more. Dial the first station group
pilot number and last station group pilot number, and press the
[HOLD/SAVE] button. Then you can see the changed station
group pilot numbers on the LCD. If you press other Flex. BTN,
you can assign other numbering plan.
STA GRP PILOT NUMBER (3) If you want to save all changed flexible numbers to system
START & END #(620-667) memory, press the [HOLD/SAVE] button. There are no errors
in the Flexible Numbers, then confirmation tone will be heard.
If some errors are detected, then error tone will be heard without
updating system memory.
BTN LCD DISPLAY ITEM

1 STA GRP PILOT NUMBER START & END #(620-667) : LDK-300 Station Group Pilot Number
STA GRP PILOT NUMBER START & END #(620-634) : LDK-100
2 INT PAGE ZONES START & END #(501-535) : LDK-300 Internal Page Zone Number
INT PAGE ZONES START & END #(501-515) : LDK-100
3 INT ALL CALL ENTER NEW #(543) Internal All Call Page
4 MEET ME PAGE ENTER NEW #(544) Meet Me Page
5 EXT PAGE ZONE 1 ENTER NEW #(545) External Page Zone - 1
8 EXT ALL CALL ENTER NEW #(548) External All Call Page
9 ALL CALL PAGE ENTER NEW #(549) All Call Page (Internal/External)
10 SMDR ACT CODE ENTER ENTER NEW #(550) SMDR Account Code Enter
11 FLASH CMD TO CO ENTER NEW #(551) Flash Command to CO Line
42
Admin Programming

12 SLT LAST SPD DIAL ENTER NEW #(552) Last Number Redial (LNR)
13 DND ENTER NEW #(553) Do-Not-Disturb
14 CALL FWD ENTER NEW #(554) Call Forward
15 SPD DIAL PGM ENTER NEW #(555) Speed Dial Program
16 MSG WAIT ENABLE ENTER NEW #(556) MSG Wait/Call-Back Enable
17 MSG WAIT RETURN ENTER NEW #(557) MSG Wait/Call-Back Answer
18 SPD DIAL ACCESS ENTER NEW #(558) Speed Dial Access
Cancel DND/CFW/Pre-selected MSG
19 DND/FWD CANCEL ENTER NEW #(559)
Features
20 SYSTEM HOLD ENTER NEW #(560) System Hold
21 STA RELOC BACKUP ENTER NEW #(561) Backup STA Relocation
22 STA RELOC RETRIEVE ENTER NEW #(562) Retrieve STA Relocation
23 SLT PGM MODE ENTER ENTER NEW #(563) SLT Program Mode Select
24 ACD REROUTE ENTER NEW #(564) ACD Reroute
TABLE 2.7.1 Flex Numbering Plan A (PGM 106)

1 ALARM RESET ENTER NEW #(565) Alarm Reset
2 GROUP CALL PKUP ENTER NEW #(566) Group Call Pick-Up
3 UCD DND ENTER NEW #(568) UCD Group DND
4 NIGHT ANSWER ENTER NEW #(569) Night Answer
CALL PARK LOCATIONS START & END #(601-619) : LDK-300
5 Call Park Locations
CALL PARK LOCATIONS START & END #(601-610) : LDK-100
6 DIRECT CALL PKUP ENTER NEW #(7) Direct Call Pick-Up
ACCESS CO GROUP FEAT START & END #(801-872): LDK-300
7 Access CO Group
ACCESS CO GROUP FEAT START & END #(801-824): LDK-100
ACCESS IND CO FEAT START&END #(88001-88200) : LDK-300
8 Access Individual CO Line
ACCESS IND CO FEAT START&END #(8801-8840) : LDK-100
9 TIE ROUTING ACCESS ENTER NEW #(8901) Tie Routing Access
10 ACCESS HELD CO FEAT ENTER NEW #(8*) Access Held CO Group
ACCESS HELD IND CO FEAT START&END # (8#001- 8#200)
11 Access Held Individual CO Line
ACCESS HELD IND CO FEAT START&END # (8#01- 8#40)
Access to CO line in the 1st available
12 ACCESS CO IN 1ST CO GRP ENTER NEW #(9)
CO Group
13 ATTENDANT CALL ENTER NEW #(0) Attendant Call
14 DOOR OPEN 1 ENTER NEW #(#*1) Door Open – 1
20 DOOR OPEN 7 ENTER NEW #(#*7) : LDK-300 Only Door Open – 7 : LDK-300 Only
21 VM MSG WAIT ENABLE ENTER NEW #(*8) VM MSG Wait Enable
22 VM MSG WAIT CANCEL ENTER NEW #(*9) VM MSG Wait Cancel
TABLE 2.7.2 Flex Numbering Plan B (PGM 107)
43
Admin Programming
2.8 IP SETTING (PGM 108)
IP address, Subnet mask, and GW address should be programmed for trace, remote upgrade, PC
Admin, PC Attendant, etc via network.
PROCEDURE
IP NET SETTING (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 108.

IP NAME z For IP Name assignment, press Flex BTN 1, and enter the
LGICKEYPHONE character.
SERVER IP ADDR(SKIP:#) z For Server IP assignment, press Flex BTN 2, and enter the 12
165.147. 3. 1 digit.
z To skip entering digit, press # button.
SERVER IP ADDR(SKIP:#) (2) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for saving database
165.147. 3. 1 permanently.
IP NET SETTING z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
INTERCOM
RANGE
1 IP Name 16 Chars - IP Name
2 Server IP Address 12 Digits - Sever Address
3 CLI IP Address 12 Digits - CLI IP Address
4 Gateway Address 12 Digits - Gateway Address
5 Subnet mask 12 Digits -
TABLE 2.8.1 IP Setting (PGM 108)
44
Admin Programming
3. STATION PROGRAMMING
If station features are to be changed, press the [TRANS/PGM] button and dial 110-124 in Admin
Programming mode. When programming, LCD and LEDs indicate current programmed data and
programming status. If the programmer enters correct data, then LCD and LED's show the entered
data and the data is stored in the temporary buffer area. To save data permanently, press the
[HOLD/SAVE] button, then all data in the temporary buffer (same as LCD/LED's status) are stored
into system memory.
3.1 STATION ID (PGM 110)
When the system is initialized, all the stations’ ID will be assigned to default value as Table 3.1.3.
PROCEDURE
STATION ID ASSIGN (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 110.

ENTER STA RANGE
(F1: ID F2 :ASC) (2) Enter station range (Ex. 100-110). LCD shows the station
st
DKTU range. First press the 1 Flex. BTN and dial two digits to
choose type of the station as Table 3.1.1.
Note: DSS Map Type is only valid with the Flex. BTN 2.
(F1: ID F2 :ASC) (3) Dial digit 12(07 for LDK-100), and SLT (DTMF) will be assigned
SLT (DTMF) to the selected station range. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button
for updating database permanently.
(F1: ID F2 :ASC) (4) In case of DSS Map type, enter the station range (Ex. 110-110)
st
DSS MAP2 : STA . . . . in the step (1). At first press the 1 Flex. BTN and enter 2-digit
(Ex. 03: DSS Map 2) and press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for
nd
updating database. Next, press the 2 Flex. BTN to assign the
associating station number. Enter the station number and press
the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database permanently.
Note: When identifying a station as a DSS, you must enter the
station number of the key station the DSS is associated with,
not station number that the DSS is using. See also TABLE
3.1.2 for DSS default button configuration.
45
Admin Programming
LDK-300 LDK-100
DGT
ITEM FLEX KEY 2 ITEM FLEX KEY 2
1 DKTU Invalid DKTU Invalid
2 DSS MAP 1 Associated STA No. DSS MAP 1 Associated STA No.
5 DSS MAP 4 Associated STA No. ICM BOX Invalid
6 DSS MAP 5 Associated STA No. WHTU Invalid
7 DSS MAP 6 Associated STA No. SLT (DTMF) Invalid
8 DSS MAP 7 Associated STA No. SLT (PULSE) Invalid
9 DSS MAP 8 Associated STA No. SLT with MSG Wait Invalid
Lamp for DTMF
10 ICM BOX Invalid SLT with MSG Wait Invalid
Lamp for Pulse
11 WHTU Invalid ISDN phone Invalid
12 SLT (DTMF) Invalid
13 SLT (PULSE) Invalid
14 SLT with MSG Wait Invalid
Lamp for DTMF
15 SLT with MSG Wait Invalid
Lamp for Pulse
16 ISDN phone Invalid
TABLE 3.1.1 Button Configuration for Station ID (PGM 110)
ITEM DEFAULT REMARK

DSS/DLS MAP 1 First 12 Buttons
Button 1 : Intrusion Button 2 : All Call Page
Button 3 : Call Park 01 Button 4 : Station Group 1
Button 5 : Camp-On Button 6 : Internal All Call Page
Button 9 : Grp Call Pickup Button 10 : External All Call Page
DSS/DLS MAP 2 Station Ports 136 – 183
DSS/DLS MAP 3 Station Ports 184 – 231 (184-227 for LDK-100)
DSS/DLS MAP 6 CO Line 01 – 48 LDK-300 Only
DSS/DLS MAP 7 CO Line 49 – 96
DSS/DLS MAP 8 CO Line 97 – 144
TABLE 3.1.2 Initial Button Configurations for DSS/DLS Map (PGM 110)
46
Admin Programming
DGT LDK-300 LDK-100

ITEM DEFAULT ID ITEM DEFAULT ID
1 DKTU DKTU DKTU DKTU
2 DSS MAP 1 DKTU DSS MAP 1 DKTU
5 DSS MAP 4 DKTU ICM BOX ICM BOX
6 DSS MAP 5 DKTU WHTU WHTU
7 DSS MAP 6 DKTU SLT (DTMF) SLT (DTMF)
8 DSS MAP 7 DKTU SLT (PULSE) SLT (DTMF)
SLT with MSG Wait
9 DSS MAP 8 DKTU SLT (DTMF)
Lamp for DTMF
SLT with MSG Wait
10 ICM BOX ICM BOX SLT (DTMF)
Lamp for Pulse
11 WHTU WHTU ISDN Phone ISDN
12 SLT (DTMF) SLT (DTMF)
13 SLT (PULSE) SLT (DTMF)
SLT with MSG Wait SLT (DTMF)
14
Lamp for DTMF
SLT with MSG Wait SLT (DTMF)
15
Lamp for Pulse
16 ISDN Phone ISDN
TABLE 3.1.3 Default Value of Station ID (PGM 110)
47
Admin Programming
3.2 STATION ATTRIBUTE – I (PGM 111)
PROCEDURE
STATION ATT 1 (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 111.

ENTER STA RANGE
100-110 STATION ATT 1 (2) Enter station range (Ex. 100-110).

(3) To program, use the Flex. BTN as Table 3.2.1. Press Flex.
BTN 1-15 for setting each value. After pressing one flex
BTN, the revised value can be set by entered digit.
100-110 AUTO SPKER Ex) When pressing Flex. BTN 1, ‘Auto Speaker Selection’
(1 : ON / 0 : OFF) : ON attribute value will be displayed.
100-110 AUTO SPKER User can change value by pressing digit 0. LCD shows the
(1 : ON / 0 : OFF) : OFF changed attribute value.
100-110 AUTO SPKER (4) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
(1 : ON / 0 : OFF) : OFF permanently.
STATION ATT 1 z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE]

PRESS FLEX KEY (01-15) button, then system goes to step (1) without updating system
memory.

Auto Speaker Allowance to access a CO line or place a DSS call
1 Selection ON/OFF ON by pressing appropriate {CO} or {DSS} button
without lifting handset or pressing the [MON] button.
2 Call Forward ON/OFF ON Enables Call Forward to be activated by the station.
3 DND ON/OFF ON Enables DND to be activated by the station.
The allowance to protect from override and camp-
4 Data Line Security ON/OFF OFF
on, when busy state.
5 Howling Tone to SLT ON/OFF ON The allowance to give howling tone to SLT
6 ICM Box Signaling ON/OFF OFF The allowance to receive ICM box signal.
The allowance to connect the transferred CO line
7 No Touch Answer ON/OFF ON
automatically when station mode is H/P.
8 Page Access ON/OFF OFF Allows access to paging by the station.
The station can give own ring type signal to another
9 Ring Type 0–4 0 station in system through this field calling party
centric.
(1:S /2:H Station rings through Speaker, Headset or Both
10 Speaker Ring SPKR
/3:BOTH) (speaker and headset).
11 Speakerphone ON/OFF ON Operate with speakerphone.
12 VMIB Slot 0-2 0 Assign VMIB logical slot with station base
01-15(LDK-300) Assign ICM Tenancy Group which is belonged to the
13 ICM Group 01
01-05(LDK-100) station
With Answering Device instead of SLT, busy tone
14 Error Tone for TAD ON/OFF OFF
will be provided instead of error tone.
In SLT, Pressing [FLASH] Key or Hook Flashing will
15 SLT Flash Drop ON/OFF OFF
drop the CO Call
TABLE 3.2.1 Button Configuration (PGM 111)
48
Admin Programming
3.3 STATION ATTRIBUTE - II (PGM 112)
PROCEDURE

ENTER STA RANGE

(3) To program, use the BTN as TABLE 3.3.1. Press Flex. BTN 1-
16 for setting each value. After pressing a Flex. BTN, the
revised value can be set by entered digit.
100-110 CO WARN TN Ex) When pressing Flex. BTN 1, ‘CO Warning Tone’ attribute value
(1 : ON/ 0 : OFF ) : OFF will be displayed.
100-110 CO WARN TN z User can change value by pressing digit 1. LCD shows the
(1 : ON/ 0 : OFF ) : ON changed attribute value.
100-110 CO WARN TN (4) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
(1 : ON/ 0 : OFF ) : ON permanently.
STATION ATT 2 z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
49
Admin Programming

The allowance to receive warning tone in order to
1 CO Warning Tone ON/OFF OFF remind the call elapse time in case of outgoing CO
line conversation. (PGM 180-BTN 22)
While on a CO line, the station user seizes another
2 Automatic Hold ON/OFF OFF CO line by depressing the {CO} button. The first
CO line goes on hold automatically. (STA2: ON)
If this flag is set to YES, station's outgoing CO call
CO Call Time
3 ON/OFF OFF may be disconnected when CO call restriction
Restriction
timer (PGM 180-BTN 17) expires.
Ind CO Line ENABLE The allowance to access individual CO line by
4 ENABLE
Access /DISABLE dialing.
ENABLE The allowance of queuing for a busy CO/group of
5 CO Line Queuing ENABLE
/DISABLE lines.
ENABLE Determines that each station user can program CO
6 CO PGM DISABLE
/DISABLE button or not.
The allowance to answer calls by simply lifting
ENABLE
7 PLA ENABLE handset or pressing the [MON] button with the
/DISABLE
answering priority. (PGM173)
The allowance to use Prepaid CO Call feature.
8 Prepaid Call ON/OFF OFF
(Refer to PGM 180-BTN 16)
ENABLE
9 Speed Dial Access ENABLE Allows access to system speed dial by the station.
/DISABLE
During incoming or outgoing Call, user can record
10 Two-way Record ON/OFF OFF
the conversation.
In Fax mode, single ring is provided and Attendant
11 Fax Mode ON/OFF OFF
recall is not operated.
ALL: Internal Off-net Call Fwd and External Off-net
12 Off-net Call Mode EXT/ALL ALL Call Fwd are allowed.
EXT: External Off-net Call Fwd is only allowed
When DID/DISA call destination is STA,
UCD Group
13 ON/OFF OFF ON: ring to UCD Grp which the station belongs to.
Service
OFF: ring to the station.
When DID/DISA call destination is STA,
Ring Group
14 ON/OFF OFF ON: ring to Ring Grp which the station belongs to.
Service
OFF: ring to the station.
Stop Camp-on Make Camp on Tone not to be heard.
15 ON/OFF OFF
Tone
16 Line Length Short/Long/Far Short Line Lengh . (SAF only)
TABLE 3.3.1 Button Configuration (PGM 112)
50
Admin Programming
3.4 STATION ATTRIBUTE - III (PGM 113)
PROCEDURE

ENTER STA RANGE

(3) To program, use the BTN as Table 3.4.1. Press flex BTN 1-10
for setting each value. After pressing one flex BTN, the revised
values can be set by input digit.
100-110 ADMIN Ex) Pressing Flex. BTN 1, ‘ADMIN’ attribute value will be displayed
(1 : EN/ 0 : DIS ) : DISABLE on the LCD.
100-110 ADMIN z User can select value by pressing digit 1, LCD shows the
(1 : EN/ 0 : DIS ) : ENABLE changed attribute value.
100-110 ADMIN (4) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
(1 : EN/ 0 : DIS ) : ENABLE permanently.
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-10) then system goes to step (1) without updating system memory.
51
Admin Programming

The allowance the station to program Admin
ENABLE
1 Admin DISABLE Database. This feature is available at only DKTU.
/DISABLE
(STA 100 : Enable as default)
ENABLE
2 VMIB Access DISABLE The allowance to access Digital Voice Unit.
/DISABLE
The allowance to use group listening (While you
ENABLE are talking on handset, by pressing the [MON]
3 Group Listening DISABLE
/DISABLE button, other people around you may hear the
conversation through the speaker of the keyset.).
ENABLE The allowance to override CO line to gain access
4 Override Privilege DISABLE
/DISABLE to the conversation.
SMDR Hidden ENABLE The allowance to hide CO dialing number on
5 DISABLE
Dialed Digits /DISABLE SMDR printing.
ENABLE
6 Voice Over DISABLE The allowance to use Voice Over feature
/DISABLE
This field is determined that Warm Line (OFF) or
7 Warm Line HOT/WRM WARM
Hot Line (ON) in PGM 122.
DVU MSG Retrieve When retrieving DVU Message, User must enter
8 ON/OFF OFF
Password password or not
DVU MSG Retrieve When retrieving DVU Message, Date and time
9 ON/OFF ON
Date/Time will be heard or not
Flex BTN 1 Alarm MISB (LDK-300)
OFF
ON/OFF Alarm MPB (LDK-100)
Flex BTN 2 Alarm RAU 1 (LDK-300)
10 Alarm Attribute OFF
ON/OFF Alarm MISB (LDK-100)
Flex BTN 3
OFF Alarm RAU 2 : LDK-300 Only
ON/OFF
TABLE 3.4.1 Button Configuration - III (PGM 113)
52
Admin Programming
3.5 ISDN STATION ATTRIBUTE (PGM 114)
PROCEDURE

ENTER STA RANGE

(3) To program, use the BTN as Table 3.5.1. Press Flex. BTN 1-
17 for setting each value. After pressing a Flex. BTN, the
revised value can be set by input digit.
100-110 CLIP DISP Ex) Pressing Flex. BTN 1, ‘CLIP LCD Display’ attribute value will
(1 : ON / 0 : OFF ) : OFF be displayed.
100-110 CLIP DISP User can change value by pressing digit 1, LCD shows the
(1 : ON / 0 : OFF ) : ON changed attribute value.
100-110 CLIP DISP (4) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
(1 : ON / 0 : OFF ) : ON permanently.
PRESS FLEX_KEY (01-17) then system goes to step (1) without updating system
memory.

This field is determined that a station displays CLIP or
1 CLIP LCD Display ON/OFF ON
not.
COLP LCD This field is determined that a station displays COLP or
2 ON/OFF OFF
Display not.
CLI / Redirect To select original CLI or redirected CLI.
3 RED/CLI CLI
Display ON: Original CLI, OFF: Redirected CLI
This field is determined that a station receives CO
4 CLI MSG Wait ON/OFF OFF
message wait or not. ON:YES, OFF:NO
To select EXT(extension number) or CO ATD to make
5 EXT or CO ATD ATD/EXT EXT
outgoing CLI or COLP information
KEYPAD This field determines that ISDN station sends digit in
6 Keypad Facility DTMF
/DTMF DTMF or keypad facility after connected.
LONG This field determines that ISDN station acts in Short
7 Long/Short SHORT
/SHORT passive mode or not.
53
Admin Programming

This field indicates how the CPN IE is filled in SETUP
message.
0: Do not send CPN (Called Party Number) to S0. In
this case, all S0 STAs of the S port will be ringing.
8 CPN Type 0-2 0
1: Send station number as CPN
2: Bypass CPN from the network.
(In the case of 1 & 2, only one specific STA will be
ringing)
This field indicates how the sub-address used in
SETUP message.
0: Station sub-address not used.
9 S0 Sub Address 0-2 0 1: Sub-address is filled in the CPN field of SETUP
message.
2: Sub-address is filled in the CPSN (Called Party Sub-
address Number) field of SETUP.
10 Reserved - - -
If this field is ON, the system checks whether the
11 CLI Name Display ON/OFF OFF received CLI is matched with the speed dial data or not.
If it is matched, the speed dial name is displayed.
Max. 4 Logical STA If outgoing CLI is active and CLI type is EXT, this field
12 ISDN CLI STA
digit No. used when making outgoing CLI.
If this field ON and a SLT seizes an ISDN line, the
Progress
13 ON/OFF OFF progress indication IE indicating the originator is non-
Indication
ISDN device is made in SETUP message.
If this field is ON, the system will not send CLI
14 ISDN CLIR ON/OFF OFF
information and restrict PX send it.
If this field is ON, the system will not send COLI
15 ISDN COLR ON/OFF OFF
information and restrict PX send it.
16 DID Restriction ON/OFF OFF Restrict the DID Call.
17 DID Call Wait ON/OFF OFF New DID call waiting indicate.
TABLE 3.5.1 Button Configuration for ISDN Station Attributes (PGM 114)
54
Admin Programming
3.6 FLEX BUTTON ASSIGNMENT (PGM 115)
Each Flex. Button in a key station can be assigned identified as one of the followings;
RANGE
No. Type REMARK
LDK-300 LDK-100
1 User Button - - User can program by button programming
procedure. (empty)
2 {CO xx} Button 001 – 200 01 – 40 CO Line
3 {CO Grp xx} 01 – 72 01 – 24 CO Group
4 {LOOP}
5 {STAxxxx} 100 – 399 100 – 227 Station No.
6 STA PGM Button 11 – 99 11 – 99
7 {STA SPDxx} 00 – 99 00 – 99 Station Speed Bin
8 {SYS SPDxxxx} 2000 –4999 2000 –3499 System Speed Bin
9 Num Pln Button Num Plan Code Num Plan Code
10 Net DSS Button When using Networking feature
TABLE 3.6.1 Button Type for Flexible Button Assignment (PGM 115)
PROCEDURE
FLEX BUTTON ASSIGN (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 115.

ENTER STA RANGE
100-110 BTN ASSIGN (2) Enter station range (Ex.100 -110).

100-110 DIAL 1 – 10 (3) To program Flexible Button, press the Flex. BTN which you
BTN 01 = CO 001 want to program (Ex. BTN 1). The LCD will display current BTN
assignment of the first station in the range, and LED of the BTN
(Ex. BTN 1) will be lit. (See Table 3.6.3). And input one digit to
choose type. If needed, enter data, then entered data will be
displayed on the LCD. (See Table 3.6.3)
100-110 BTN ASSIGN (4) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
PRESS FLEX_KEY(01-44) permanently.
100-110 BTN ASSIGN z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
PRESS FLEX_KEY(01-44) then system goes to step (2) without updating system memory.
55
Admin Programming
BTN 12-Button (Digital) 24-Button (Digital)

1 {CO 1} {CO 1}
2 {CO 2} {CO 2}
3 {CO 3} {CO 3}
4 {CO 4} {CO 4}
5 {CO 5} {CO 5}
6 {CO 6} {CO 6}
7 {CO 7} {CO 7}
8 {CO 8} {CO 8}
9 {CO 9} {CO 9}
10 {CO 10} {CO 10}
11 {CO 11} {CO 11}
12 {LOOP} {LOOP}
13 - 24 -
TABLE 3.6.2 Initial Button Configuration (PGM 115)
BTN TYPE DATA

Button 01 - 24 1 - 24 1 : User Button -
2 : CO CO Line
3 : CO GRP CO Group
4 : LOOP -
5 : STA … Station No.
6 : STA PGM (11-99) Station Programming Code
7 : SPD (00-99) Speed Bin No.
8 : SYS SPD System Speed Bin No.
9 : Num Plan Code Num Plan Code
TABLE 3.6.3 Button Configuration for Flexible Button Assignments (PGM 115)
56
Admin Programming
3.7 STATION COS (PGM 116)
All stations’ COS for day and night operation are 1 as default. For a particular call, the CO COS is
combined with station COS to determine restriction. Each station must be assigned a class of service
which governs that station's toll restriction for the day and night operation. The weekend COS is same
as night COS. (Table 3.7.1 and Table 3.7.2)
STA COS 1 No restrictions are placed at the station for dialing.

STA COS 2 The assignments in the Exception Table A are monitored for allow and deny numbers.
STA COS 3 The assignments in the Exception Table B are monitored for allow and deny numbers.
STA COS 4 The assignments in both Exception Tables A & B are monitored for allow and deny numbers.
STA COS 5 The leading digit dialed can not be a long distance code. The dialed digits can be longer than 7
digits. There is no restriction for the number in Canned Toll Table.
STA COS 6 The leading digits can not be a Long Distance code. Only eight digits maximum can be dialed.
There is no restriction for the number in Canned Toll Table.
STA COS 7 Intercom and paging calls are allowed. No dialing allowed on CO lines. ICM boxes are assigned
with this COS.
TABLE 3.7.1 Station Class-Of-Service (PGM 116)
CO COS 1 CO COS 2 CO COS 3 CO COS 4 CO COS 5

STA No Restriction No Restriction No Restriction Restricts Long Distance No restriction
COS 1 Applied Applied Applied code. Only within 7 digits. applied
Possible to dial the
number in Canned Toll
Table.
STA Exception Table Exception Table No Restriction Restricts Long Distance No restriction
COS 2 A governs the A governs the Applied code. Only within 7 digits. applied
dialing dialing Possible to dial the
Table.
STA Exception Table No Restriction Exception Table Restricts Long Distance No restriction
COS 3 B governs the Applied B governs the code. Only within 7 digits. applied
dialing dialing Possible to dial the
Table.
STA Exception Table Exception Table Exception Table Restricts Long Distance No restriction
COS 4 A&B governs the A governs the B governs the code. Only within 7 digits. applied
dialing dialing dialing Possible to dial the
Table.
STA Restricts Long Restricts Long Restricts Long Restricts Long Distance No restriction
COS 5 Distance code. Distance code. Distance code. code. Only within 7 digits. applied
STA Restricts Long Restricts Long Restricts Long Restricts Long Distance No restriction
COS 6 Distance code. Distance code. Distance code. code. Only within 7 digits. applied
Only within 7 Only within 7 Only within 7 Possible to dial the
digits. Possible to digits. Possible to digits. number in Canned Toll
dial the number dial the number Possible to dial Table.
in Canned Toll in Canned Toll the number in
Table. Table. Canned Toll
Table.
STA In-house dialing In-house dialing In-house dialing In-house dialing only In-house dialing
COS 7 only only only only
TABLE 3.7.2 Toll Checking Table (PGM 116)
57
Admin Programming
PROCEDURE
STATION COS (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 116.

ENTER STA RANGE
100-110 STATION COS (2) Enter station range (Ex. 100-110).

DAY=1 NIGHT=1
(3) To program, use the BTNs as Table 3.7.3. To change the COS
for day operation, press Flex. BTN 1 and dial COS (1 digit) and
to change the COS for night operation, press Flex. BTN 2 and
dial COS (1 digit). Then changed COS will be displayed on the
LCD. (Ex. day = 5, night =3)
100-110 STATION COS (4) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
DAY=5 NIGHT=3 permanently.
STATION COS z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
ENTER STA RANGE then system goes to step (1) without updating system memory.
BTN DEFAULT RANGE REMARK

1 1 1–7 Day Class-Of-Service
2 1 1–7 Night / Weekend Class-Of-Service
TABLE 3.7.3 Button Configuration for Station COS (PGM 116)
58
Admin Programming
3.8 CO LINE GROUP ACCESS (PGM 117)
If you want to change CO line group access of some stations, program this item. Default gives to
access CO Line Group 1 for all stations.
PROCEDURE
CO GROUP ACCESS (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 117.

ENTER STA RANGE
SELECT CO GROUP RANGE (2) Enter station range (Ex 100-110).

PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-3) In case of LDK-300 press the Flex. BTN 1~3 to program access
authority of the CO line Group.
(3) LEDs of BTN 01-24 show current CO line group 01-24 access
of the first station in the range. To program CO line group 01-24
access authority, press BTN 01-24 for toggle setting at the CO
line group 01-24 Access Programming mode. (LED ON: Station
can access the CO line group. / LED OFF: Station cannot
access the CO line group.)
100-110 CO GRP (01-24) (4) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
PRESS FLEX_KEY permanently.


1 - 1-24 CO line Group 01-24 (Toggle)
2 - 1-24 CO line Group 25-48 (Toggle) : LDK-300 Only
3 - 1-24 CO line Group 49-72 (Toggle) : LDK-300 Only
TABLE 3.8.1 CO Line Group Access (PGM 117)
59
Admin Programming
3.9 INTERNAL PAGE ZONE (PGM 118)
Each station is assigned to internal paging zone. A station can be in any or no zone at all. Internal all
call is defined as the sum of all zones. If station is not in any internal zone, it will not receive any
internal page announcement. In LDK-300(100) system supports 30(10) internal paging zones.
Default assigns all stations to Internal Page Zone 1.
PROCEDURE
INTERNAL PAGE ZONE (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 118.

ENTER STA RANGE
SELECT PAGE ZONE RANGE (2) Enter station range (Ex 100-110).
F1: 1-24 F2: 25-30 In case of LDK-300 press the Flex. BTN 1~2 to program access
authority of the Internal Page Group. Suppose BTN 1 pressed.
100-110 (ZONE 01-24) (3) LEDs of BTNs show currently assigned page zones of the first
PRESS FLEX_KEY (01-24) station in range. To assign Internal page zone to the stations,
press one of BTNs for toggle setting. Each button means
Internal Page Zone 01-24. (LED ON: Stations are in the internal
page zones. LED OFF: Stations are not in the internal page
zones.)
100-110 (ZONE 01-24) (4) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
PRESS FLEX_KEY (01-24) permanently.


1 1 1 - 24 (LDK-300) Internal Page Zone 01 – 24(10) (Toggle)
1 - 10 (LDK-100)
2 - 1-6 Internal Page Zone 25 - 30 (Toggle) : LDK-300 Only
TABLE 3.9.1 Internal Page Zone Access (PGM 118)
60
Admin Programming
3.10 CONFERENCE PAGE ZONE (PGM 119)
Each station is assigned to conference paging zone. A station can be in any or no zone at all. LDK-
300 and LDK-100 support 5 conference paging zones.
Default assigns all stations to None.
PROCEDURE
CONFERENCE PAGE ZONE (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 119.

ENTER STA RANGE
100 - 110 ( ZONE 31 - 35 ) (2) Enter station range (Ex 100-110). LEDs of BTNs show currently
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1 – 5) assigned page zones of the first station in range. In LDK-100,
ZONE 11-15 will be displayed instead of ZONE 31-35.
(3) To assign Conference Page zone to the stations, press one of

BTNs for toggle setting. Each button means Conference Page
Zone 1-5. (LED ON: Stations are in the conference page zones.
LED OFF: Stations are not in the conference page zones.)
CONFERENCE PAGE ZONE (4) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
ENTER STA RANGE permanently.
CONFERENCE PAGE ZONE z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,

- 1-5 Conference Page Zone (Toggle)
TABLE 3.10.1 Conference Page Zone Access (PGM 119)
61
Admin Programming
3.11 ICM TENANCY GROUP (PGM 120)
A station belongs to only one ICM tenancy group. A station in ICM Tenancy Group (A) can call another
station in other ICM Tenancy Group (B) if the station in the ICM Tenancy Group (A) is programmed to
be allowed to access ICM Tenancy Group (B).
LDK-300(100) system supports 15(5) ICM Tenancy Groups and Tenancy ATDs.
PROCEDURE
ICM TENANCY GROUP (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 120. In LDK-100, the range will be 1-5.
ENTER GRP NUMBER(01-15)
ICM TENANCY GRP 01 (2) Enter the group number (Ex. 01).
F1: ATD F2:ACCESS
(3) To program ICM Tenancy Group, use the buttons as Table
3.11.1.
ICM TENANCY GRP 01 z To assign attendant station of the ICM tenancy group, press
ATD : …. BTN 1 and enter the station number to be assigned as
attendant, then assigned attendant station number will be
ICM TENANCY GRP 01 z To assign accessible ICM tenancy groups for the group, press
ENTER ACCESS GROUP(1-15) BTN 2. Then the LCD will show the status and LEDs of BTNs
show current accessible ICM tenancy groups. In LDK-100, the
range is 1-5. To change ICM tenancy groups access, press the
Flex. BTN for toggle setting. (LED ON: stations have the
authority to access the ICM tenancy group. LED OFF: stations
have not the authority to access the ICM tenancy group.).
Pressing the [CONF] button, the system will goes to step (2)
without updating database.
ICM TENANCY GRP 01 (4) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
F1: ATD F2:ACCESS permanently.
ICM TENANCY GRP 01 z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
F1: ATD F2:ACCESS then system goes to step (2) without updating system memory.

1 - STA No. Attendant station of assigned ICM tenancy group
2 GROUP 01 BTN 01-15(LDK-300) ICM tenancy groups allow to access for assigned group
BTN 1-5 (LDK-100)
TABLE 3.11.1 Button Configuration of ICM Tenancy Group (PGM 120)
62
Admin Programming
3.12 PRESET CALL FORWARD (PGM 121)
A station can be programmed so that incoming CO lines can be forwarded to a preset station or
station group if the first station(or station group) does not answer after Preset Call Forward timer.
No station is assigned as default.
PROCEDURE
CALL FWD PRESET (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 121.

ENTER STA NUMBER
(1:STN /2:HUNT GRP) (2) Enter the station number to which you want to forward
FROM 101 TO .... (Ex.101). LCD shows current status of the station.
Dial 1 if you want to forward the call to station,
or dial 2 if want to forward to hunt group. (Ex. dial 2.)
ENTER FWD HUNT GRP NO. (3) Enter the preset hunt group number which first station forward
FROM 101 TO HUNT .... to. (Ex.620)
CALL FWD PRESET z To clear the Preset Call Forward station, press the [SPEED]
FROM 101 TO HUNT 620 button.
CALL FWD PRESET (4) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
ENTER STA NUMBER permanently.
CALL FWD PRESET z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
ENTER STA NUMBER then system goes to step (1) without updating system memory.
63
Admin Programming
3.13 HOT LINE / WARM LINE (PGM 122)
This feature lets a station perform a pre-assigned feature as soon as lifting handset or pressing the
[MON] button as if a station selects the feature (Hot Line). On the other hand, Idle Line Selection for a
station which is assigned to warm line, is activated when takes no action for Warm Line Timer after
lifting handset or pressing the [MON] button (Warm Line). Warm line is programmable at PGM 113.
By default, all stations are not assigned any Idle Line Selection.
PROCEDURE
IDLE LINE SELECTION (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 122.

ENTER STA RANGE
100-110 IDLE LINE (2) Enter station range (Ex.100-110). User can enter one digit (1-4)
NOT ASSIGNED and LCD shows the default value of idle line selection.
(3) To program Idle Line Selection, use the Table 3.13.1. To assign
Idle Line Selection, dial one digit (1-4) and enter related data.
Then selected value and the related data will be displayed on
LCD. Otherwise, to delete any Idle Line Selection, press the
[SPEED] button, then Idle Line Selection assignment will be
deleted.
IDLE LINE SELECTION (4) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
IDLE LINE SELECTION z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
DGT ITEM RANGE REMARK

1 Flex. BTN 01 - 44 To activate a feature on a flex button as if pressed.
001 – 200 (LDK-300)
2 CO Line To seize a CO Line
01 – 40 (LDK-100)
01 – 72 (LDK-300)
3 CO Group To seize a CO Line Group
01 – 24 (LDK-100)
100 – 399 (LDK-300)
4 Station To call an another station
100 – 227 (LDK-100)
TABLE 3.13.1 Button Configuration for Hot Line/Warm Line (PGM 122)
64
Admin Programming
3.14 CTI STATION ATTRIBUTE (PGM 123)
This sets the features/modes used when CTIU8/30 or CTI module is connected at a key station. User
can use a CTI keyset with PC when the CTI station mode is set to CTI mode. (Please refer to the
User’s Guide of TAPI-NT.)
PROCEDURE
CTI STATION ATT (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 123.

ENTER STA RANGE
CTI STATION ATT (2) Enter station range (Ex.100 - 110). User can select Flex. BTN
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-2) 1or 2.
100-110 CTI MODE (0-2) (3) To program, use the Flex BTNs as Table 3.14.1. To program
CTI MODE (2) the CTI station's mode, press Flex. Button 1 and dial CTI mode
0-2. By default, CTI station's mode is CTI mode (1).
100-110 STA BAUD(0-2) (4) To program the CTI station's baud rate, press Flex. Button 2
1200 (1) and dial baud rate 0-2. By default, CTI station's baud rate is
1200 (0).
100-110 STA BAUD(0-2) (5) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
1200 (1) permanently.
CTI STATION ATT z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
BTN ITEM DEFAULT RANGE REMARK

CTI Station Determines the CTI keyset mode
1 1 0-2
Mode 0: Inactive, 1: CTI Mode, 2: At Mode
CTI Station's Determines the baud rate of the CTI keyset
2 0 0-2
Baud Rate 0: 1200, 1: 2400, 2: 4800
TABLE 3.14.1 Button Configuration for CTI Station Attribute (PGM 123)
65
Admin Programming
3.15 SMDR ACCOUNT GROUP (PGM 124)
Stations can be assigned as member of call account group on SMDR. A station belongs to only one
call account group. In LDK-300(100), system supports 99(23) SMDR Account Groups.
All stations are not assigned as member of any Call Account Group by default.
PROCEDURE
SMDR ACCOUNT GROUP (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 124.

ENTER STA RANGE
100-110 SMDR ACCT GRP (2) Enter station range (Ex.100-110). LCD shows current account
(00 – 99) : 01 group status of the first station in the range. In LDK-100, the
range is 00-23.
(3) To assign Call Account Group: enter group number, then

assigned Call Account Group Number will be displayed on the
LCD. Otherwise, to cancel assignment of Call Account Group,
press the [SPEED] button then it will be displayed on the LCD.
SMDR ACCOUNT GROUP (4) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
SMDR ACCOUNT GROUP z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
66
Admin Programming
4. CO LINE PROGRAMMING
If CO line features are to be changed, press the [TRANS/PGM] button and dial 140-144 in Admin
Programming Mode. When programming, LCD and LEDs indicate current programmed data and
programming status. If the programmer enters correct data, then LCD and LEDs show the entered
data and the data is stored in the temporary buffer area. To save the data permanently, press the
[HOLD/SAVE] button, then all data in the temporary buffer (same as LCD/LEDs show their status) are
stored into system memory.
4.1 CO SERVICE TYPE (PGM 140)
In this program mode, you can program the following items;
PROCEDURE
COL SERVICE ATT (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 140.

ENTER COL RANGE
001-002 COL SVC (2) Enter CO line range. User can select COL Service Type by
F1:TYPE F2:SUB ATT pressing Flex. BTN 1.
001-002 SVC TYPE (1-5) (3) To program, select the desired type as Table 4.1.2. Press
NORMAL CO (1) digit 1-5 to select CO service type (Type 1-5 is exclusive and
the default value is NORMAL CO.).
001-002 SVC TYPE (1-5) z To change the type, press another digit (Ex. 3), then LCD
displays the select type immediately. To save the current
ISDN DID / MSN (3)
type, press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
001-002 COL SVC (4) To set the sub-attributes of the selected type, press Flex.
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-2) BTN 2. See Table 4.1.2.
001-002 DISA ATT (5) In Normal CO type, user can set the 3 sub-attributes; Day,
Night, or Weekend. Each attribute also has 3 sub attributes.
F1:DAY F2:NIGHT F3: WEND
At first, choose a Flex. BTN. (Day/Night/Weekend: 1, 2, 3)
See Table 4.1.2.
001-002 DISA ATT (6) User can set the DISA attributes by pressing Flex. BTN 1~2.
F1: SVC F2: VMIB Do this procedure for other attribute. See Table 4.1.2.
001-002 DISA SVC z Press Flex. BTN 1 to set DISA Service ON/OFF. After
entering the desired value, press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to
(1 : ON/ 0 : OFF) : OFF
save the value.
001-002 VMIB ANNC z Press Flex. BTN 2 to select VMIB Announcement No.
VMIB MSG .. (00-70) z When VMIB Announcement number is assigned and CCR
table (PGM 228) matched with VMIB Announcement No is
programmed, CCR feature is activated.
COL SERVICE ATT (4) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
ENTER COL RANGE permanently.
COL SERVICE ATT z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE]
ENTER COL RANGE button, then system goes to step (1) without updating system
memory.
67
Admin Programming
ITEM REMARK
All lines are assigned as normal CO lines as default.
Each CO line in the system can be programmed as DISA (Direct Inward System Access) line
and the DISA types are as follows;
- Flex BTN 1 (Day) / 2 (Night) / 3 (Weekend)
Normal CO
- Each DISA type (BTN 1-3) has sub-attribute
F1: DISA Service On/Off
F2: VMIB Message No. (Voice announcement (VMIB Message) can be assigned (00-70
and it is not assigned (00) as default.)
Each CO line in the system can be programmed as DID (Direct Inward Dialing) line and the DID
Analog DID types are as follows;
- 1(Immediate Start) / 2 (Wink Start) / 3 (Delayed Dial Start) (BTN 1-3 are exclusive)
ISDN DID/ If ISDN board (BRIB, PRIB) is assigned for operating with DID type.
MSN
TIE line types are as follows;
TIE
- / 1 (RD) / 2 (LD) / 3 (EM-C) / 4 (EM-D) / 5 (EM-I)
If R2DCOB (E1 R2) board is assigned for operating with DID type.
DCO DID
TABLE 4.1.1 CO Service Type (PGM 140)
BTN TYPE FLEX BTN 2 DEFAULT SUB ATTR REMARK

DISA Attributes For each Item;
-Flex BTN 1 (Day) Flex BTN 1 - DISA Service: ON/OFF
1 Normal CO
-Flex BTN 2 (Night) Flex BTN 2 – VMIB MSG (00- 70)
-Flex BTN 3 (Weekend) (00: not assigned)
Flex BTN 1 Signal Type –1: Immediate Start
ANALOG : (Signal Type) 2: Wink Start
2 -
DID Flex BTN 2 3: Delayed Dial Start
: (INFO NO) INFO NO : 00 – 70 (00: not assigned)
ISDN DID /
3
MSN
1:RD -
2:LD
4 TIE 3:EM-C RD Enter digit
4:EM-D
5:EM-I
5 DCO DID
TABLE 4.1.2 Button Configuration for CO Service Type (PGM 140)
68
Admin Programming
4.2 CO LINE ATTRIBUTE – I (PGM 141)
PROCEDURE
CO LINE ATT 1 (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 141.

ENTER COL RANGE
001-002 CO LINE ATT1 (2) Enter CO line range.

(3) To program, press the Flex. BTN as Table 4.2.1. Press BTN 1-
10 and enter related data, then entered data will be displayed
on the LCD.
001-002 DISA ACCT CODE (4) Press Flex. BTN 3 and assign DISA Account Code.
(1 : ON/ 0 : OFF) : OFF
001-002 FLASH TYPE (5) To set Flash Type, press Flex. BTN 7.
(1: GND/ 0: LOOP) : LOOP
001-002 FLASH TYPE (6) To alter Flash Type, dial 1-0 .(Ex. dial 1)
(1: GND/ 0: LOOP) : LOOP
001-002 DISA ACCT CODE (7) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
(1 : ON/ 0 : OFF) : OFF permanently.
CO LINE ATT 1 z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
ENTER COL RANGE then system goes to step (1) without updating system memory.
69
Admin Programming

Groups should be assigned according to CO type
00-73 (LDK-300)
1 CO Line Group 01 and Class-Of-Service.
00-25 (LDK-100)
(00:private, 73(25) : not used)
-CO COS 1: no restriction
-CO COS 2: Exception Table A governs
2 CO COS 1-5 1 -CO COS 3: Exception Table B governs
-CO COS 4: restricts Long Distance Code
-CO COS 5: overrides STA. COS 2,3,4 and 5, 6.
When accessed another CO line in the system by
3 DISA Account Code ON/OFF OFF DISA line, you should enter authorization code if
this flag is set.
4 CO Line Assign POL/LOOP LOOP Polarity Reverse, Loop Start
When marked PBX, a 1 or 2 digit dial code may be
5 CO Line Type PBX/CO CO
entered after which toll restriction is applied.
6 CO Line Signal Type DTMF/PULSE DTMF DTMF, Pulse
7 Flash Type GROUND/LOOP LOOP
8 UNA ON/OFF OFF The allowance of Universal Night Answer service
CO Line Group
9 ON/OFF OFF
Account
01-15(LDK-300) Tenancy Group of CO line.
10 CO Tenancy Group 01
01-05(LDK-100)
TABLE 4.2.1 Button Configuration for CO Attribute - I (PGM 141)
70
Admin Programming
4.3 CO LINE ATTRIBUTE – II (PGM 142)
PROCEDURE
CO LINE ATT 2 (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 142.

ENTER COL RANGE
CO LINE ATT 2 (2) Enter CO line range.

(3) To program, use the Flex. BTNs as Table 4.3.1. Flex. BTN 1, 4,
7-11,14 may set On/Off. Press BTN 2, 3, 5, 6, 12, 13 and enter
related data for setting, then entered data will be displayed on
the LCD.
001-002 CO DIST RING (4) To assign CO Distinct Ring, press Flex. BTN 5. (Ex. To change
(0-4) : 3 Ring Type, dial 0-4. (Ex: dial 3))
001-002 CO DIST RING (5) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
(0-4) : 3 permanently.
001-002 MOH(00-14) (6) To change MOH type, press Flex. BTN 6, and dial 00-13. In
INT MUSIC (1) LDK-100, the range is 00-12
001-002 MOH(00-14) (7) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
INT MUSIC (1) permanently.
CO LINE ATT 2 z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,

CO Line Name If CO line name is assigned at BTN2, and this field
1 Display ON/OFF OFF is ON, CO name is displayed when a CO line call is
received.
CO Line Name Max 12 characters
2 Max 12 char -
Assign
There are 7 metering signal types:
- 0 : None
- 1 : 50 Hz
- 2 : 12 KHz
3 Metering Unit 00-06 00
- 3 : 16 KHz
- 4 : Singular Polarity Reverse (SPR)
- 5 : Plural Polarity Reverse (PPR)
- 6 : No Polarity Reverse (NPR)
If this field set to ON, CPT checks the incoming CO
4 Line Drop using CPT ON/OFF OFF line when answered and if CPT detects dial tone,
then system drops the line for toll restriction.
71
Admin Programming

The CO line can give his own ring type signal to
5 CO Distinct Ring 0-4 0 station in system through this field. This ring type
can be programmed at PGM 422.
0: Not assigned by this field.
1: Internal Music
0-13 (LDK-300) 2~4: External Music
6 CO Line MOH 1
0-12 (LDK-100) 5~6(7): VMIB MOH
7(8)-11(12): SLT MOH
12(13): Hold Tone
YES: PX or PABX provides dial tone.
7 PABX CO Dial Tone YES/NO YES NO: PX or PABX does not provide dial tone and the
LDK system provides dial tone.
If R2 PX which does not give you tone for called
party status exists, then the system provides tone
PABX CO Ring Back
8 YES/NO NO according to cause value (This field is only when
Tone
Cause means that Ring back is provided by PX.).
YES: PX, NO: System
PABX CO Error
Tone
Cause means that error tone is provided by PX.).
YES: PX, NO: System
PABX CO Busy
Tone
Cause means that busy tone is provided by PX.).
YES: PX, NO: System
PABX CO Announce according to cause value (This field is only when
11 YES/NO NO
Tone Cause means that announcement is provided by
PX, but the system provides only error tone.).
YES: PX, NO: System
12 CO Flash Timer 000 – 300 005 10msec base
Open Loop Detect 100msec base
13 00 - 20 00
Timer
14 Line Length LONG/SHORT SHORT Line Length of CO.(SAF only.)
TABLE 4.3.1 Button Configuration for CO Attribute - II (PGM 142)
72
Admin Programming
4.4 ISDN CO LINE ATTRIBUTE (PGM 143)
PROCEDURE
COL ISDN ATT (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 143.

ENTER CO RANGE
001-009 COL ISDN ATT (2) Enter CO line range.

PRESS FLEX KEY (01-07)
(3) To program, press the Flex. BTN as Table 4.4.1. BTN 6 can
toggle for the value. Press other BTNs and enter related data
for setting, then it will be displayed entered data on the LCD.
001-009 DID REMOVE NO (4) To set DID Remove Number, press Flex. BTN 5. (Ex. To alter
(00-99) : 00 DID_RN dial number, dial 21.)
001-009 DID REMOVE NO (5) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
(00-99) : 21 permanently.
001-009 COL ISDN ATT z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
PRESS FLEX KEY(01-07) then system goes to step (2) without updating system memory.

To make called party number with assigned COLP
Not
1 COLP Table Index 00 – 50 Table entry. (PGM 201)
Assigned
00~49: PGM 201 Bin No. / 50: PGM 114-BTN 5
To make calling party number with assigned CLIP
Not
2 CLIP Table Index 00 – 50 Table entry. (PGM 201)
Assigned
00~49: PGM 201 Bin No. / 50: PGM 114-BTN 5
0: Unknown
1: International
3 Call Type 0–4 2 2: National
3: Not used
4: Subscriber
0: convert digits by DID Dgt Conversion (PGM230)
4 DID CONV Type 0–2 0 1: call to the valid extension.
2:convert digits by Flex DID Table (PGM231)
Not Remove received digits from the left as to the
5 DID Remove No. 00 – 99
Assigned assigned #
ON: Enblock Sending Mode
6 ISDN Enblock Send ON/OFF OFF
OFF: Overlap Sending Mode
ORI(1)/CF ORI : Send CLI as the originate caller’s CLI.
7 CLI Transit CFW(0)
W(0) CFW : Send CLI as the call forwarded station’s CLI.
TABLE 4.4.1 Button Configuration for ISDN CO Attribute (PGM 143)
73
Admin Programming
4.5 CO RING ASSIGNMENT (PGM 144)
PROCEDURE
CO RING ASSIGNMENT (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 144.

ENTER COL RANGE
001-002 PRESS KEY (2) Enter CO line range. User can select one of 4 Flex. BTNs.
DAY NIGHT WEEK ON-D
001-002 DAY CO RING (3) For the selected one of 4 modes (day, night, weekend, on-d),
DIAL TYPE (1:S/2:H/3:D) enter one digit (1-3) to select a type. When entering a digit,
menu moves to the selected type setting.
001-002 ENTER STA RANGE z In case of DEST TYPE 1, first enter station range. If the
STA :100-150 DLY : . . entered range is valid, LCD shows the value and system
moves delay input state with confirmation tone.
001-002 ENTER STA RANGE z After entering station range, enter desired value of delay. To
STA : 100-150 DLY : 9 save the station range and delay value, press the
[HOLD/SAVE] button.
001-002 DAY CO RING z In case of DEST TYPE 2, enter desired value of hunt group.
HUNT GRP : . . . To save the value, press the [HOLD/SAVE] button
001-002 NIGHT CO RING z In case of DEST TYPE 3, Enter desired value of voice
VMIB MESSAGE 50 message. (Ex. 50) To save the value, press the [HOLD/SAVE]
button.
001-002 NIGHT CO RING z To drop the call after VMIB message, press “#’ after entering
VMIB MESSAGE 50(#) voice message number.
001-002 PRESS KEY (4) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
DAY NIGHT WEEK ON-D permanently.
001-002 PRESS KEY z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
DAY NIGHT WEEK ON-D then system goes to step (2) without updating system memory.
BTN ITEM DEST TYPE RANGE DEFAULT

1 Day Not assigned (••)
TYPE 1 : STA Range + Delay STA Range Delay : 0 - 9
2 Night Not assigned
TYPE 2 : Hunt Group Hunt GRP : 620 – 6XX
3 Weekend Not assigned
TYPE 3 : Voice Message Voice Message : 01~70
4 ON-Demand Drop : #
TABLE 4.5.1 Button Configuration for CO Station Ring Attribute (PGM 144)
74
Admin Programming
4.6 CO RING ASSIGNMENT DISPLAY (PGM 145)
PROCEDURE
CO RING ASSIGN DISPALY (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 145.

ENTER COL RANGE
001-002 PRESS KEY (2) Enter CO line range. User can select one of 4 Flex. BTNs.
DAY NIGHT WEEK ON-D
C001(D): 100(0) 101(0) • If DAY/NIGHT ring is assigned to the station, You can see the
102(1) 103(1) 104(1) delay value also.
C001(W) You can move to the other (Day/Night/Weekend/On-demand)

VMIB MSG 02 (00-70) modes by press Flex button.
BTN ITEM REMARK

1 Day
2 Night When there are too many stations to see, you can scroll data using
3 Weekend volume up/down key.
4 ON-Demand
TABLE 4.6.1 Button Configuration for CO Station Ring Attribute (PGM 145)
75
Admin Programming
5. SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING

If system parameters are to be changed, press the [TRANS/PGM] button and dial 160-179. When
programming, LCD and LEDs indicate current programmed data and programming status. The
the temporary buffer area. Pressing the [HOLD/SAVE] button, all data in the temporary buffer (same
as LCD/LEDs show their status) are stored into permanent system memory.
5.1 SYSTEM ATTRIBUTE - I (PGM 160)
PROCEDURE
SYSTEM ATT 1 (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 160. The system attributes fields are shown in
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-13) TABLE 5.1.1.
ATD CALL QUE RB TONE (2) To program the Attendant Call Queuing Ring back Tone, press
(1 : RBT/ 0 :MOH ) : MOH the Flex. BTN 1. Entering a desired value, the LCD shows the
changed value.
CAMP RBT/MOH (3) To select the Camp Ring back tone or MOH, press the Flex.
(1 : RBT/ 0 :MOH ) : MOH BTN 2. Entering a desired value, the LCD shows the changed
value.
CO LINE CHOICE (4) To program the CO Line Choice, press the Flex. BTN 3.
(1: LAST/ 0: ROUND) : LAST Entering a desired value, the LCD shows the changed value.
(1: Last Choice, 0: Round Robin)
DISA RETRY CNT (5) To program DISA Retry Count, press the Flex. BTN 4 and dial
(1–9):3 1 digit (1-9). Entering a desired value, the LCD shows the
changed value.
ICM CONT DIAL TONE (6) To program the Intercom Continuous dial tone, press the Flex.
(1: CONT/ 0: DISC) : CONT BTN 5. Entering a desired value, the LCD shows the changed
value. (1: Continuous, 0: Discontinuous)
CO DIAL TONE DET (7) To program the CO dial Tone Detect, press the Flex. BTN 6.
(1 : ON/ 0 : OFF) : OFF Entering a desired value, the LCD shows the changed value.
EXT NIGHT RING (8) To program the External Night ring, press the Flex. BTN 7.
(1 : ON/ 0 : OFF) : OFF Entering a desired value, the LCD shows the changed value.
HOLD PREFENCE (9) To program the Hold Preference, press the Flex. BTN 8.
(1: SYS/ 0: EXC) : SYS Entering a desired value, the LCD shows the changed value.
(1: System, 0: Exclusive)
MULTI LINE CONF (10) To program the Multi Line Conference, press the Flex. BTN 9.
(1 : ON/ 0 : OFF) : ON Entering a desired value, the LCD shows the changed value.
PRT LCR CONV DGT (11) To program Print LCR Conversion Digit, press the Flex. BTN
(1: ON/ 0: OFF) : OFF 10. Entering a desired value, the LCD shows the changed
value.
76
Admin Programming
CONF WARNING TONE (12) To program Conference Warning Tone, press the Flex. BTN
(1 : ON/ 0 : OFF) : ON 11. Entering a desired value, the LCD shows the changed
value.
CONF WARNING TONE (13) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
(1 : ON/ 0 : OFF) : ON permanently when setting value in each flex BTN.
SYSTEM ATT 1 z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-13) then system goes to step (1) without updating system memory

RBT: The station will be presented ring back tone
Attendant Call Queuing when calling busy attendant station.
1 RBT/MOH MOH
Ring back Tone MOH: The station will be presented MOH, hold tone
or VMIB-MOH by system database (PGM171-BTN2)
2 CAMP RBT/MOH RBT/MOH MOH MOH or Ring back tone is heard in camp-on.
LAST/ The method of a CO line seizing on CO line group
3 CO Line Choice LAST
ROUND access (Last Choice/Round-robin)
When the DISA user fails to call a station or access
a feature, then DISA user can retry other calls or
4 DISA Retry Counter 1-9 3 features within this retry counter. If DISA user
cannot access appropriately within this counter, the
DISA line will be disconnected automatically.
ICM Continuous Dial- CONT/ This field sets whether ICM dial tone is continuous
5 CONT
Tone DISCONT or not.
When the speed dial is activated, system detects
6 CO Dial-Tone Detect ON/OFF OFF
dial tone using CPT instead of pause timer.
When CO lines are marked to UNA, ringing will be
7 External Night Ring ON/OFF OFF sent to LBC1 when an incoming call is received on
those lines during night service.
SYS/ System hold or exclusive hold
8 Hold Preference SYS
EXEC
9 Multi-line Conference ON/OFF ON The system allows a conference with multi-CO lines.
Print dialed digits or LCR conversed digits in LCD
10 Prt LCR Conv Dgt ON/OFF OFF
and SMDR.
Conference Warning When a new member enters a conference, other
11 ON/OFF ON
Tone members will hear warning tone.
12 Offnet Prompt Usage ON/OFF ON In case of Offnet call forward, offnet prompt will be
heard.(It is only applied to CO-to-CO Transfer)
13 Offnet DTMF Tone ON/OFF ON In case of Offnet call forward, DTMF tone will be
heard.(It is only applied to CO-to-CO Transfer)
TABLE 5.1.1 Button Configuration for System Attribute - I (PGM 160)
77
Admin Programming
5.2 SYSTEM ATTRIBUTE - II (PGM 161)
PROCEDURE
SYSTEM ATT 2 (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 161.

NETWORK TIME/DATE (2) To program, use the Flex. BTNs as Table 5.2.1. Press one of
(1 : ON/ 0: OFF) : OFF the Flex. BTNs 1-14. (EX. Flex. BTN 1) Entering a desired
value, the LCD shows the changed value.
NETWORK TIME/DATE (3) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
(1 : ON/ 0: OFF) : OFF permanently when setting values in each Flex. BTN.
SYSTEM ATT 2 z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
78
Admin Programming

Network Time/Date If this field is ON, the system time/date are set by the
1 ON/OFF OFF
Setting network time/date.
MUTE/ The off-hook ring type in the system can be set to
2 Off-Hook Ring Type MUTE
BURST mute or one burst ring.
If there is no available CO line in the 1st CO group,
3 Override 1st CO Group ON/OFF ON system can access the next accessible CO group
when this field is ON.
4 Page Warning Tone ON/OFF ON If desired, page warning tone can be suppressed.
The system can be programmed to override CO line
call to gain access to the conversation. If privacy is
5 Auto Privacy ON/OFF ON
disabled, a station privileged to override in PGM113-
BTN 4 joins an existing call in progress.
6 Privacy Warning Tone ON/OFF ON If desired, privacy warning tone can be suppressed.
Changes a cadence of ICM or incoming CO ring. In
case of NO,
7 Single Ring for CO Call YES/NO NO ICM: 1sec on/ 4sec off
CO : 0.4s on/ 0.2s off/ 0.4s on/ 4sec off
In case of YES, the cadence is the reverse.
8 WTU Auto Release ON/OFF OFF Enable or disable auto release of WTU
1:10s/
9 ACD Print Enable OFF Enable or disable ACD Print feature
0:OFF
001 –255 Determines the amount of time between repeated
10 ACD Print Timer 001
(3 digits) ACD database prints. (10 sec or 1 hour base)
Clear ACD Database Determines that initialize ACD database after print-
11 ON/OFF OFF
after Print out.
12 VMIB Prompt Gain 00-31 08 To control prompt gain level.
When Voice Mail information printed through RS232
port by SMDI, if this is ‘ON’, system use new Type 1
13 New VM Type Set ON / OFF OFF
print format (CLI added, see RS232 Spec.) instead of
Type 2.
HOUR/ Determines the unit of ACD Print timer of Flex Btn 10
14 ACD Print Timer Unit SEC
SEC (1 hour or 10 seconds).
TABLE 5.2.1 Button Configuration for System Attribute - II (PGM 161)
79
Admin Programming
5.3 ADMIN PASSWORD (PGM 162)
Admin password can be assigned to enter Admin Programming mode for only administrator who
knows the Admin Password. It is not assigned by default.
PROCEDURE
ADMIN PASSWORD (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 162.

....
ADMIN PASSWORD (2) To assign Admin Password, enter 4 digits number, then
1234 entered admin password will be displayed on the LCD.
Otherwise to delete the admin password, press the [SPEED]
button. (Ex. 1234)
ADMIN PASSWORD (3) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
.... permanently.
80
Admin Programming
5.4 ALARM ATTRIBUTES (PGM 163)
PROCEDURE
SYSTEM ALARM ATT (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 163.

ALARM ENABLE (2) To program, use the Flex. BTNs as Table 5.4.1. Press one of
(1 : ON/ 0: OFF) : OFF the Flex. BTNs 1-4. (Ex. Flex. BTN 1) Entering a desired value,
the LCD shows the changed value.
Note: An SLT must not be assigned to receive signals for either the
alarm or door bell.
ALARM ENABLE (3) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
(1 : ON/ 0: OFF) : OFF permanently when setting value in each Flex. BTN.
SYSTEM ALARM ATT z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,

1 Alarm Enable ON/OFF OFF
2 Alarm Contact Type CLOSE/OPEN CLOSE Close, Open
3 Alarm Mode ALARM / BELL ALARM Alarm, Door Bell
4 Alarm Signal Mode RPT/ONCE RPT Repeat , Once
TABLE 5.4.1 Button Configuration for Alarm Attribute (PGM 163)
81
Admin Programming
5.5 ATTENDANT ASSIGNMENT (PGM 164)
Maximum 5 Attendants can be assigned including the Main Attendants and System Attendant. The
system attendant is different with main attendant in aspect of the call handling and system
management priority. The system attendant has more powerful priority than main attendant. The
system and main attendants can be assigned each 1 and maximum 4. So the sum of system and main
attendants should be less than 5. As default, the System Attendant is assigned to Station 101, and
others are not assigned.
PROCEDURE
ATTENDANT ASSIGNMENT (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 164.

101 .... .... .... ....
ATTENDANT ASSIGNMENT (2) To assign System Attendants (one of 1-5), press the Flex.
101 .... .... .... .... BTN 1. Enter the station number, then assigned system
attendant station number will be displayed on the LCD.
Otherwise to delete any system attendant, press the Flex.
BTN, which want to delete and press the [SPEED] button.
Note: It is impossible to delete the first System Attendant.
MAIN ATD ASSIGN (3) To assign Main Attendants (one of 2-5), press the Flex.BTN 2.
101 .... .... .... .... And the procedure is the same as system attendant
assignment.
ATTENDANT ASSIGNMENT (4) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
101 .... .... .... .... permanently.
ATTENDANT ASSIGNMENT z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
101 .... .... .... .... then system goes to step (1) without updating system memory
82
Admin Programming
5.6 AUTO ATTENDANT VMIB ANNC ASSIGNMENT (PGM 165)
User may set the number of the VMIB announcement for auto attendant.
PROCEDURE
AUTO ATTENDANT (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 165.

AUTO ATTENDANT (2) To program the number of VMIB announcement for auto
VMIB ANNC : 55 (00-70) attendant, Press Flex Key2 and dial the number of VMIB
announcement location. (Ex. dial 55) Then the dialed number
will be displayed on the LCD.
AUTO ATTENDANT (3) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
VMIB ANNC : 55 (00-70) permanently.
AUTO ATTENDANT z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,

1 AUTO ATD USAGE ON/OFF OFF
2 VMIB ANNC 00 - 70 00
83
Admin Programming
5.7 CO-TO-CO COS (PGM 166)
When an external user of DID/DISA/TIE line tries to access another CO line in the system, CO-to-CO
COS is applied. The attributes of CO-to-CO COS are the same as the station COS.
PROCEDURE
CO TO CO COS (1 – 7) (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 166.

DAY: 1 NIGHT/WEEKEND: 1
(2) To program, use the Flex. BTNs as Table 5.7.1. To change the
COS for Day operation, press Flex. BTN 1 and dial the COS (1
digit) and to change the COS for Night/Weekend operation,
press Flex. BTN 2 and dial COS (1 digit). (Ex. Day:2, N/W:3)
Then changed COS will be displayed on the LCD.
CO TO CO COS (1 – 7) (3) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database

DAY: 2 NIGHT/WEEKEND:3 permanently.
CO TO CO COS (1 – 7) z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,

DAY: 1 NIGHT/WEEKEND:1 then system goes to step (1) without updating system memory

1 Day COS 1-7 1 Day Class-of-Service
2 Night/Weekend COS 1-7 1 Night/Weekend Class-of-Service
TABLE 5.7.1 Button Configuration for CO-to-CO COS (PGM 166)
84
Admin Programming
5.8 DID/DISA DESTINATION (PGM 167)
When a station receives a DID/DISA call which is busy, invalid or vacant, the call may be sent to
Attendant, forwarded to Hunt group or tone is presented to the called party by Admin programming.
Selecting Attendant as the DID/DISA destination, the call will follow ring assignment at first. If there is
no ring assigned station, the call will be sent to Attendant.
PROCEDURE
DID/DISA DEST (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 167. One of BTN 1-4 show assigned DID
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-4) Busy/Error/No Answer destination. To see VMIB Prompt
Usage Press Flex BTN4
BUSY DESTINATION (2) To assign Busy Destination, press Flex. BTN 1.

TONE (F1 – F3)
BUSY DESTINATION z Ex. Press Flex BTN 2 to assign Attendant as Busy

ATD (RING ASGN) Destination. To save, press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
BUSY DESTINATION z Ex. Press Flex BTN 3 and dial Hunt # to assign Hunt Group
HUNT: 620 620 as Busy Destination. To save, press the [HOLD/SAVE]
button.
BUSY DESTINATION (3) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
HUNT: 620 (F1-F3) permanently.
VMIB PROMPT USAGE (4) To assign VMIB Prompt Usage, Press Flex BTN 4
BUSY PROMPT USAGE z Ex. Press Flex BTN 1 to change Busy Prompt Usage. To
(1:ON / 0:OFF) : ON save, press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
DID/DISA DEST z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,

1 Busy Destination F1-F3 1 1: Tone
2 Error Destination F1-F3 1 2: Attendant (Ring Assign)
3 No Answer Destination F1-F3 1 3: Forward to Hunt Group
4 VMIB PROMPT USAGE F1-F5
1 Busy Prompt Usage ON / OFF ON If the field is set as “OFF”, each Prompt
2 Error Prompt Usage ON / OFF ON is not supplied to the calling party.
3 DND Prompt Usage ON / OFF ON This field affects only DID service CO
4 No Ans Prompt Usage ON / OFF ON line. DISA line doesn’t affect this field.
5 Atd Xfer Prompt Usage ON / OFF ON
TABLE 5.8.1 Button Configuration for DID/DISA Destination (PGM 167)
85
Admin Programming
5.9 EXTERNAL CONTROL CONTACT (PGM 168)
By default, External control contacts are not assigned at all.
PROCEDURE
EXT CONTROL CONTACT (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 168.

PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-X)
EXT CONTROL CONTACT (2) Select one of External Control Contacts with Flex. BTN 1-7(1-6
NO 1 : .… ( 1 – 5 ) for LDK-100). Then the pressing BTN’s LED will be lit and
currently assigned External Control Contact will be displayed
on the LCD. (Ex. External Control Contact 1: Flex. BTN 1).
EXT CONTROL CONTACT (3) To assign Loud Bell Control to External Control Contact, dial 1
NO 1 : LBC 150 and enter station number. Then entered data will be displayed
on the LCD. (Ex. STA 150).
EXT CONTROL CONTACT (4) To assign Door to External Control Contact, dial 2.
NO 1 : DOOR OPEN
EXT CONTROL CONTACT z To assign External Control Device 1 to External Control

NO 1 : EXT_1 Contact, dial 3. In LDK-300/100, only 3 External Control
Devices are allowed.
EXT CONTROL CONTACT z To assign External Control Device 2 to External Control

NO 2 : EXT_2 Contact, dial 4.
EXT CONTROL CONTACT z To delete the assignment of External Control Contact, press the
NO 1 : ... [SPEED] button.
EXT CONTROL CONTACT (5) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-7) permanently when setting value in each Flex. BTN.
EXT CONTROL CONTACT z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,

1 First Contact 1–5 - 1: LBC(STA #)
2 Second Contact 1–5 - 2: Door
3 Third Contact 1–5 - 3: Ext. 1
4 Forth Contact 1–5 - 4: Ext. 2
5 Fifth Contact 1–5 - 5: Ext. 3
6 Sixth Contact 1–5 -
7 Seventh Contact 1–5 - LDK-300 Only
TABLE 5.9.1 External Control Contact (PGM 168)
86
Admin Programming
5.10 LCD TIME/DATE/LANGUAGE DISPLAY MODE (PGM 169)
The LCD Time/Date/Language display formats can be set. Two LCD Time formats are Ordinary (12-
hour)/Military (24-hour) mode and two LCD date formats are Day/Month/Year (DDMMYY) or
Month/Day/Year (MMDDYY) mode. The LCD language format can be set, too.
PROCEDURE
LCD DISPLAY MODE (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 169.

LCD TIME MODE (2) To program the LCD time display mode, press the Flex.
(1: 12H/ 0: 24H) : 12H BTN 1. Then user can select the desired value with LCD
display.
1: 12-Hour mode, 0 : 24-Hour mode
LCD DATE MODE (3) To program LCD date display mode, press the Flex. BTN
(1: MMDD/ 0: DDMM) : DDMMYY 2. Then user can select the desired value with LCD display.
1: MM-DD-YY, 0: DD-MM-YY
LCD LANGUAGE (00-24) (4) To program LCD language format, press the Flex. BTN 3
ENGLISH (00) and dial 2-digit as language format. (See TABLE 5.10.1)
The LCD will be changed to the current value.
LCD LANGUAGE (00-24) (5) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
ENGLISH (00) permanently.
LCD DISPLAY MODE z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE]
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-3) button, then system goes to step (1) without updating
system memory

12-Hour Mode
1 LCD Time Display Mode 12H/24H 12H
24-Hour Mode
MMDDYY Month/Day/Year
2 LCD Date Display Mode DDMMYY
/ DDMMYY Day/Month/Year
00: English,
01: Italian,
02: Finnish,
03: Dutch,
04: Swedish,
05: Danish,
06: Norwegian,
00
3 LCD Language Display Mode 00-14 07: Hebrew,
(English)
08: Germany,
09: French,
10: Portuguese,
11: Spanish,
12: Korean,
13: Estonia,
14: Russian
TABLE 5.10.1 Button Configuration for LCD Time/Date/Language Display Mode (PGM 169)
87
Admin Programming
5.11 MODEM (PGM 170)
PROCEDURE
MODEM ASC DEVICE (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 170. In LDK-100, ‘STA:227’ will be displayed.
STA : 399 (F1: STA F2: CO)
MODEM ASC DEVICE (2) To program MODEM Attributes, press the one of Flex. BTN 1-2
STA : 399 (F1: STA F2: CO) as Table 5.11.1.
z To set modem associated device for station, press Flex. BTN 1

MODEM ASC DEVICE and digit the number. Then entered data will be displayed on
CO : . . . (F1: STA F2: CO) LCD. To save, press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
z To set modem associated device for CO, press Flex. BTN 2
and digit the number. Then entered data will be displayed on
LCD. To save, press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
MODEM ASC DEVICE (3) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
CO : 010 (F1: STA F2: CO) permanently.
MODEM ASC DEVICE z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
STA : 399 (F1: STA F2: CO) then system goes to step (1) without updating system memory
RANGE DEFAULT
BTN ITEM REMARK
LDK-300 LDK-100 LDK-300 LDK-100
1 STA No. 100 – 399 100 – 227 STA 399 STA 227 Last Station
2 CO No 001 – 200 01 – 40 -
TABLE 5.11.1 Button Configuration for Modem Assignment (PGM 170)
88
Admin Programming
5.12 MUSIC (PGM 171)
PROCEDURE
MUSIC ASGN (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 171.

(2) To program, use the Flex. BTNs as Table 5.12.1. Press BTN 1-
4 and enter the related data. Then entered data will be
BGM TYPE (00-12) (3) To program the background music type, press the Flex. BTN 1.
INT MUSIC (1) To change the BGM type, press two digits of 00-12. In LDK-
100, the range is 00-11. Then entered data and related BGM
type will be displayed on the LCD.
BGM TYPE (00-12) z Ex. Dial 3 as a BGM type.

EXT MUSIC 2 ( 3)
MOH TYPE (00-13) (4) To program the MOH type, press the Flex. BTN 2. To change
INT MUSIC (1) the MOH type, press two digits of 00-13. In LDK-100, the range
is 00-12. Then entered data and related MOH type will be
ICM BOX MUSIC CH (00-12) (5) To program the ICM box music channel, press the Flex. BTN 3.
INT MUSIC (1) To change the ICM box music channel, press two digits of 00-
12. In LDK-100, the range is 00-11. Then entered data and
related ICM box music channel will be displayed on the LCD.
ASSIGN SLT MOH (6) To program the SLT MOH, press the Flex. BTN 4. To assign
.... .... .... .... .... the SLT MOH, press a flexible button between F1-F5 and enter
the SLT station number. To save the data, press the
[HOLD/SAVE] button whenever entering each station number.
The LCD will indicate each MOH channel assigned at the SLT
station.
MUSIC ASGN (7) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-4) permanently.
MUSIC ASGN z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-4) then system goes to step (1) without updating system memory
89
Admin Programming
RANGE
LDK-300 LDK-100
0: None
1: Int. Music
1 BGM Type 00-12 00-11 01 2-4: External Music 1-3
5-6(7): VMIB BGM1-2(3)
7(8)-11(12): SLT MOH
0: None
1: Int. Music
2-4: External Music 1-3
2 MOH Type 00-13 00-12 01 5-6(7): VMIB BGM1-2(3)
7(8)-11(12): SLT MOH
12(13) : Hold Tone
0: None
1: Int. Music
ICM Box Music
3 00-12 00-11 01 2-4: External Music 1-3
Channel 5-6(7): VMIB BGM1-2(3)
7(8)-11(12): SLT MOH
Flex. 1-5
4 Assign SLT MOH - SLT MOH 1-5
(+ SLT STA No.)
TABLE 5.12.1 Button Configuration for System Attribute - II (PGM 171)
90
Admin Programming
5.13 PBX ACCESS CODE (PGM 172)
Maximum 4 PABX Access Codes are assignable. PABX Access Code is 1 or 2-digit number. By
default, PABX Access Codes are not assigned at all.
PROCEDURE
PABX ACCESS CODE (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 172. LCD shows currently assigned PABX
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-4) Access codes.
PABX ACCESS CODE 1 (2) To assign PABX Access code, press Flex. BTN 1-4 and do one
9 of followings:
z Dial 2 digits or 1 digit number to assign PBX Access Code.
z Press the [SPEED] button to delete PBX Access Code.
(3) For example, pressing Flex. BTN 1 and dialing 9, the changed
value will be displayed on the LCD.
PABX ACCESS CODE (4) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
PABX ACCESS CODE z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
5.14 PLA PRIORITY SETTING (PGM 173)
The PLA priority can be programmable with CO recalling, transfer call, incoming call and queued call.
PROCEDURE
XFR REC INC QUE (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 173.

1 2 3 4
XFR REC INC QUE (2) To change the PLA priority, first choose one of 4 Flex. BTNs as
2 1 4 3 XFR REC INC QUE, and press one digit of 1-4. Then entered
digit and related data will be displayed on the LCD.
(Ex. Flex. BTN 2 and dial 1)
XFR REC INC QUE (3) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
2 1 4 3 permanently.
XFR REC INC QUE z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
1 2 3 4 then system goes to step (1) without updating system memory

1 XFER (Transfer Call) 1–4 1 PLA priority is set exclusively
2 REC (Recall) 1–4 2
3 INC (Incoming Call) 1–4 3
4 QUE (Queued Call) 1–4 4
TABLE 5.14.1 PLA Priority Setting (PGM 173)
91
Admin Programming
5.15 RS-232C PORT SETTING (PGM 174)
PROCEDURE
RS232 PORT SETTING (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 174. To select a RS232C port, use the Flex.
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-5) BTNs as Table 5.15.1. In LDK-100, the range (1-3) will show.
COM1 PORT SETTING (2) To program RS232 Port 1, press Flex. BTN 1. Then the entered
F1:BD F2:CTS F3:BK F4:P COM port and related data will be displayed on LCD.
COM1 BAUDRATE z To program BAUDRATE, press Flex. BTN 1 and press one
BAUDRATE: 19200 digit of 0-7 Then related data will be displayed on the LCD.
Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to save it.
COM1 CTS/RTS z To program CTS/RTS, press Flex. BTN 2 and press one digit of
(1:ON/0:OFF):OFF 0-1. Then the related data will be displayed on the LCD. Press
the [HOLD/SAVE] button to save it.
COM1 PAGE BRK z To program PAGE BREAK, press Flex. BTN 3 and press one
(1:ON/0:OFF):OFF digit of 0-1. Then the entered data will be displayed on the
LCD. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to save it.
COM1 LINE PAGE z To program LINE PAGE, press Flex. BTN 4 and press three
(001-199) : 060 digit of 001-199. Then the entered data will be displayed on
COM1 PORT SETTING (3) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
F1:BD F2:CTS F3:BK F4:P permanently.
COM1 PORT SETTING z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
F1:BD F2:CTS F3:BK F4:P then system goes to step (1) without updating system memory

1 COM1 Port Setting Flex. BTN 1-4
2 COM2 Port Setting Flex. BTN 1-4
3 COM3 - MODU Port Setting Flex. BTN 1-4
4 COM4 - MISB Port Setting Flex. BTN 1-4 LDK-300 Only
5 COM5 - MISB Port Setting Flex. BTN 1-4 LDK-300 Only
TABLE 5.15.1 Button Configuration for RS-232 Port Setting (PGM 174)

0: Unknown 1: Unknown
2: 1200 Baud 3: 2400 Baud
1 BAUDRATE 0-7(Note1) 19200
4: 4800 Baud 5: 9600 Baud
6: 19200 Baud 7: 38400 Baud
2 CTS/RTS ON/OFF OFF
3 P-BREAK ON/OFF OFF
4 LPP 001-199 060
Note1) Only COM2 port can use 57600-baud rate with setting the baud rate value ‘8’.
TABLE 5.15.2 Button Configuration for COM Port (PGM 174)
92
Admin Programming
5.16 PRINT PORT SELECTION (PGM 175)
PROCEDURE
PRINT PORT SELECTION (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 175. To select print port, use the BTNs as
PRESS FLEX_KEY (01-12) Table 5.16.1.
OFF LINE SMDR (01-13) z To program Off-line SMDR/STAT print mode, press Flex. BTN
COM2 (02) 1 and press two digits of 01-13. In LDK-100, the range is 00-11.
Then the entered digit and related data will be displayed on the
ADMIN DATA (01-13) z To program Admin data print mode, press Flex. BTN 2 and
COM2 (02) press two digits of 01-13. In LDK-100, the range is 00-11. Then
the entered digit and related data will be displayed on the LCD.
SMDI (01-13) z To program SMDI print mode, press Flex. BTN 4 and press two
COM2 (02) digits of 01-13. In LDK-100, the range is 00-11. Then the
entered digit and related data will be displayed on the LCD.
ONLINE SMDR (01-13) z To program On-line SMDR mode, press Flex. BTN 6 and press
COM2 (02) two digits of 01-13. In LDK-100, the range is 00-11. Then the
entered digit and related data will be displayed on the LCD.
TRACE (01-13) z To program TRACE mode, press Flex. BTN 7 and press two
COM2 (02) digits of 01-13. In LDK-100, the range is 00-11. Then the
entered digit and related data will be displayed on LCD. Press
the [HOLD/SAVE] button to save it.
PRINT PORT SELECTION (2) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
PRINT PORT SELECTION z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
93
Admin Programming
RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

BTN ITEM LDK- LDK- LDK- LDK-
LDK-300 LDK-100
300 100 300 100
1 Off-line SMDR/ 01-13 01-11 COM2 COM1 01: COM1 01: COM1
Statistics Print 02: COM2 02: COM2
2 Admin Print 01-13 01-11 COM2 COM1 03: COM3-MODU 03: COM3-MODU
3 Traffic 01-13 01-11 COM2 COM1 04: COM4-MISB 04: TELNET 1
4 SMDI Print 01-13 01-11 COM2 COM1 05: COM5-MISB 05: TELNET 2
5 Call Information 01-13 01-11 COM2 COM1 06: TELNET 1 06: TELNET 3
6 Info/On-line SMDR 01-13 01-11 COM2 COM1 07: TELNET 2 07: ISDN
7 Trace 01-13 01-11 COM2 COM1 08: TELNET 3 08: NET_PCADM
09: ISDN 09: NET_PCATD
8 Debug 01-13 01-111 COM2 COM1
10: NET_PCADM 10: NET_CTI
9 PC Admin 01-13 01-11 NET_PCADM
11: NET_PCATD 11: NET_REMOTE
10 PC Attendant 01-13 01-11 NET_PCATD
12: NET_CTI
11 CTI 01-13 01-11 NET_CTI
13: NET_REMOTE
12 Remote Diagnostic 01-13 01-11 NET_REMOTE
TABLE 5.16.1 Button Configuration for Print Port Selection (PGM 175)
5.17 PULSE DIAL RATIO (PGM 176)
In LDK-300/100, pulse dial speed ratio is set only for 10 PPS.
PROCEDURE
PULSE DIAL RATIO (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 176.

(1:66/33 0:60/40) : 66/33
PULSE DIAL RATIO (2) To assign Pulse Dial Ratio, press the one digit 0-1 as TABLE
(1:66/33 0:60/40) : 60/40 5.17.1. Then the selected value will be displayed on the LCD.
(Ex. digit 0: 60/40)
PULSE DIAL SPD RATIO (3) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
(1:66/33 0:60/40) : 60/40 permanently.
DGT PULSE DIAL SPEED RATIO REMARK

1 10 PPS 66/33 % Defaults
0 10 PPS 60/44 %
TABLE 5.17.1 Button Configuration for Pulse Dial Speed Ratio (PGM 176)
94
Admin Programming
5.18 SMDR ATTRIBUTES (PGM 177)
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) will provide details on both incoming and outgoing calls. As
an assignable database option, if All Call record type is selected, incoming and outgoing local and long
distance calls are all provided. If only Long Distance is selected, then only outgoing calls that meet the
toll check status requirements listed below are provided.
PROCEDURE
SMDR ATTRIBUTES (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 177. To program SMDR attributes, use the
PRESS FLEX_KEY (01-14) BTNs as TABLE 5.18.1.
SMDR SAVE z To program SMDR save mode, press the Flex. BTN 1. The
(1 : ON/ 0: OFF) : OFF LCD will show the current related field status. User can change
the value by pressing one digit. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button
to save it.
SMDR PRINT z To program SMDR print mode, press the Flex. BTN 2. The LCD
(1 : ON/ 0: OFF) : ON will show the current related field status. User can change the
value by pressing one digit. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to
save it.
RECORD TYPE z To program SMDR recording call type, press the Flex. BTN 3.
(1 : LD/ 0: ALL) : LD The LCD will show the current related field status. User can
change the value by pressing one digit. Press the
[HOLD/SAVE] button to save it.
LD CALL DGT CNT z To program SMDR long distance call digit counter, press the
(07-15) : 07 Flex. BTN 4 and dial 2 digits. (Ex. 07) Then the LCD will be
changed to the current related field status. Press the
PRINT INCOMING CALL z To program SMDR incoming call print mode, press the Flex.
(1 : ON/ 0: OFF) : OFF BTN 5. Then the LCD will show the current related field status.
User can change the value by pressing one digit. Press the
PRINT LOST CALL z To program SMDR lost call print mode, press the Flex. BTN 6.
(1 : ON/ 0: OFF) : ON Then the LCD will show the current related field status. User
can change the value by pressing one digit. Press the
RECORD IN DETAIL z To program the record detailed SMDR, press the Flex. BTN 7.
(1 : ON/ 0: OFF) : ON Then the LCD will show the current related field status. User
can change the value by pressing one digit. Press the
95
Admin Programming
HIDDEN DIALED DGT z To program SMDR dial digit hidden, press the Flex. BTN 8 and
(0–9):7 dial one digit. (Ex. 7) Then the LCD will be changed to the
current related field status. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to
save it.
SMDR CURRENCY UNIT z To assign currency unit, press the Flex. BTN 9. Then the LCD
ABC will be changed to the current related field status. Refer to the
English Character Set to enter currency unit. Press the
COST PER PULSE (6DGT) z To program SMDR cost per unit pulse, press the Flex. BTN 10
000000 and dial 6 digits. Then the LCD will be changed to the current
related field status. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to save it.
SMDR FRACTION z To program SMDR fraction, press the Flex. BTN 11 and dial
(0-5) : 0 one digit. Then the LCD will be changed to the current related
field status. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to save it.
LONG DISTANCE CODE z To program SMDR long distance codes, press the Flex. BTN
0 .. .. .. .. 14. Then the current related field status on the LCD. Press 1-5
Flex. BTN and dial maximum 2 digits. Press the [HOLD/SAVE]
button to save it.
SMDR ATTRIBUTES (2) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
SMDR ATTRIBUTES z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
96
Admin Programming

1 SMDR Save Enable ON/OFF OFF The system can be set to save SMDR record or not.
2 SMDR Print Enable ON/OFF OFF The system can be set to real time print.
The system can be set to record either all outgoing
calls or only long distance calls, exceeding time limit
Long Distance /
3 LD/All Call LD set by SMDR Start Timer. The long distance calls are
All Call Recorded
identified by programmed SMDR long distance code
(BTN 14).
SMDR Long
If SMDR digit counter is more than this value, it is
4 Distance Call Digit 07-15 07
considered as long distance call.
Counter
If this option (PIC) is set to Enable, all incoming
5 Print Incoming Call ON/OFF OFF calls are printed with either all outgoing calls or long
distance calls.
If this option (PLC) is set to Enable, all lost calls are
6 Print Lost Call ON/OFF ON
printed with either unanswered or not.
Due to limited system memory size, in places where
many calls take place, the SMDR record buffer can
easily saturated. So, if the customer doesn't need
7 Records in Detail ON/OFF ON the detailed call information but total call, total
metering count and total cost for individual station,
then it is possible to save only the total accumulation,
rather than the whole detailed records.
According to this value, SMDR dial digit will be
SMDR Dial Digit
8 0-9 0 hidden and ‘*’ symbol will be displayed instead of
Hidden
the hidden digits.
For easy identification of call cost, the currency unit
SMDR Currency
9 3 Chars - can be entered with 3 alphabet characters to be
Unit
printed in front of call charge amount.
SMDR Cost Per This is the call cost unit per cost metering pulse,
10 6 digits -
Unit Pulse which is sent from the Central Office.
This value means the decimal position point of the
11 SMDR Fraction 0-5 0
cost per unit pulse.
12 SMDR Start Timer 000-250 000 1 sec base
Right/
13 SMDR Hidden Digit Right Hide digits from right or left
Left
Max. 5 SMDR long distance codes are available.
SMDR Long Flex. BTN
14 0 SMDR long distance code is 1 or 2 digit number. By
Distance Codes 1–5
default, SMDR long distance code is 0.
TABLE 5.18.1 Button Configuration for SMDR Attributes (PGM 177)
97
Admin Programming
5.19 SYSTEM TIME/DATE SETTING (PGM 178)
In LDK-300/100, date and time can be set by Admin programming, and it will be shown in the LCD of
stations.
PROCEDURE
SET SYSTEM TIME/DATE (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 178.

PRESS FLEX_KEY (1 - 2)
SET SYSTEM TIME/DATE z To program the system time, press the Flex. BTN 1 and enter
TIME 12:30 (HH:MM) Hour/Minute (HHMM) in 24-hour format. Then the LCD will be
changed to the current related field status.
SET SYSTEM TIME/DATE z To program the system date, press the Flex. BTN 2 and enter
DATE: 05/10/00 (MMDDYY) Month/Date/Year (MMDDYY) format. Then the LCD will be
changed to the current related field status.
SET SYSTEM TIME/DATE (2) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
SET SYSTEM TIME/DATE z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
BIN ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

1 System Time 4 digits - Hour/Min in sequence
2 System Date 6 digits - Month/Day/Year in sequence
TABLE 5.19.1 System Time/Date Setting (PGM 178)
98
Admin Programming
5.20 LINKED STATION PAIRS TABLE (PGM 179)
PROCEDURE
LINKED STA_PAIR (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 179.

F1 : VIEW F2 : INPUT
LINKED STA_PAIR (2) Press the Flex. BTN 2 and dial two station numbers sequentially
100 / 200 to enter a linked station pair.
The station number entered at left side will be master station,
and the other will be the slave.
LINKED STA_PAIR z If entered station has linked station already, then linked station
110 / 120 number will be displayed automatically. (Ex. When 110,120 is
already linked pair, dial 110)
LINKED STA_PAIR (3) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating/saving current
..../.... linked pair permanently. As this procedure, linked pairs can be
assigned continuously.
z To delete linked station pair, press the [SPEED] button and the
[HOLD/SAVE] button.
100 108 150 152 (4) When linked pairs are assigned, press Flex. BTN 1 to see the
110 155 151 160 linked station pairs. Two station numbers of each column
means linked pair (Ex. Master 100 & slave 110, 108 & 155, 150
& 151, 152 & 160). Press [τ] button to view the next 4 linked
pairs. To enter another linked pair, press Flex. BTN 2, then the
system goes to step (2).
ALL LINKED PAIRS DELETE (5) To delete all linked pairs, press the [SPEED] button. If you press
PRESS [HOLD/SAVE] BTN the [SPEED] button, confirmation message will be displayed.
Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button, and all linked pairs will be
deleted
LINKED STA_PAIR z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
F1 : VIEW F2 : INPUT then system goes to step (1) without updating system memory

100 – 399 (LDK-300) All Linked Station Pairs
1 Review Linked Station Pairs None
100 – 227 (LDK-100) are displayed.
2 Enter Linked Pair 2 STA # - STA # / STA #
TABLE 5.20.1 Linked Station Pairs (PGM 179)
Note: If you assign linked pair with wired station (DKT or SLT) and wireless station (WHTU), please
assign wired station to be the master station.
99
Admin Programming
5.21 CIDU SETTING (PGM 185)
To use CIDU(Analog CO Line CLI Decoder), this admin program must be set.
PROCEDURE
CIDU SETTING (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 185.

CID USAGE (2) Press the flexible button 1, and enter the “CID USAGE” set
(1:ON/0:OFF):OFF field. Press dial ‘1’ to enable the CID usage.
CID NAME DISPLAY (3) Press the flexible button 2, and enter the “CID NAME
(1:NAME/0:TEL) : TEL DISPLAY” set field. Press dial ‘1’ to display the caller name,
and press dial ‘0’ to display ther caller telephone number.
SERIAL PORT SEL (4) Press the flexible button 3, and enter the “SERIAL PORT SEL”
(1-4) : COM1 set field. Press dial 1~5 to set the serial port for CIDU
connection.In LDK-100, the range of the serial ports is 1-2.
000 001 002 003 (5) To mapping the CIDU port and the analog CO line port, press
001 002 003 004 the flexible button 4. Upper line of LCD messages is present
the CIDU port number and the lower line is present the analog
CO line port number.

1 CID Usage ON / OFF OFF Set the CID usage enable.
Set the LCD display mesage
Name (1) /
2 CID Name Display Telephone No.(0) between the character name or
Telephone No.(0)
the telephone number.
1-4 (LDK-300) Set the serial port for CIDU
3 Serial Port Select COM1
1-2 (LDK-100) connection.
Set the CIDU port and the
4 CID/CO Line Port Mapping 000-063 -
analog CO line port mapping.
5 Initialize CID Data Initialize the CIDU admin.
6 CID type II Usage ON / OFF OFF Set the CID type II usage
TABLE 5.21.1 CIDU Setting (PGM 185)
100
Admin Programming
6. SYSTEM TIMERS
6.1 SYSTEM TIMERS - I (PGM 180)
PROCEDURE
SYSTEM TIMER 1 (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 180.

(2) To program, use the BTNs as TABLE 6.1.1. Press one of BTN
1-22 and enter related data. (LED of selected Flex. BTN will be
lit.)
ATD RECALL TMR(min) (3) To program the Attendant Recall Timer, press the Flex. BTN 1.
(00 – 60) : 01 The current value will be displayed on the LCD and user can
enter a desired value. Then LCD shows the changed value.
SYSTEM TIMER 1 (4) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
SYSTEM TIMER 1 z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,

00 – 60 01 Determines the amount of time before system
1 Attendant Recall Timer
(2 Digits) (min) disconnects the call
Determines the amount of time before a call placed in
000 – 600 120
2 Call Park Recall Timer a call park location will recall the station placing the
(3 Digits) (sec)
park.
000 – 200 030 If a station transfers to busy station and hang up, this
3 Camp-on Recall Timer
(3 Digits) (sec) recall timer is assigned.
Exclusive Hold Recall 000 – 300 060 Determines the amount of time before a call placed on
4
Timer (3 Digits) (sec) exclusive hold will recall the station placing the hold.
000 – 300 030 Determines the amount of time before a call recalls
5 I-Hold Recall Timer
(3 Digits) (sec) the attendant.
000 - 300 030 Determines the amount of time before a call placed on
6 Sys Hold Recall Timer
(3 Digits) (sec) system hold will recall the station placing the hold.
Determines the amount of time a transferred call will
000 - 300 030
7 Transfer Recall Timer ring at the station receiving the transfer and how long
(3 Digits) (sec)
it will recall the station transferring the call.
When ACNR Pause Timer expires and there is no
available CO Line in the group, this timer is invoked.
000 - 300 030
8 ACNR Delay Timer When ACNR Delay Timer expired,
(3 Digits) (sec)
- Invoke ACNR Pause Timer if is no available CO line.
Still, ACNR is activated.
This timer is invoked after system detects CO ring
10 - 50 30
9 ACNR No Answer Timer back tone or voice from CO party. After this timer,
(2 Digits) (sec)
system retries ACNR.
101
Admin Programming

005 - 300 030
10 ACNR Pause Timer When expired, ACNR is activated.
(3 Digits) (sec)
01 – 30 03 This is decreased every time station retries ACNR,
11 ACNR Retry Counter
(2 Digit) ACNR is canceled if it set to 0.
ACNR No Tone 1–9
12 1 The number of retry count to detect tone.
Retry Counter (1 Digit)
This timer is invoked upon completion of dialing
ACNR Tone Detect 000 –300 030 and system considers the CO party is busy when
13
Timer (3 Digits) (sec) the CPTU cannot detect the valid tone type until
this timer expires.
Automatic CO Release 020 –300 030 Uncompleted CO line call will be automatically
14
Timer (3 Digits) (sec) released after this timer.
This field is used for the CCR inter-digit timer in the
000 - 255 030
15 CCR Inter-digit Timer DISA/DID CO line. In DID type 2, it is used for DID
(3 Digits) (100ms)
inter-digit timer.
If prepaid money is going to expire during a CO line
conversation, system will give warning tone and after
CO Call Drop Warning 00 - 99 10
16 this time the call will be disconnected. This timer is
Timer (2 Digits) (sec)
also used for call drop warning in Unsupervised
Conference.
CO Call Restriction 00 - 99 0
17 Outgoing CO line call is allowed for this time.
Timer (2 Digits) (min)
Voice connection to the outside party will be made
00 - 99 01 after this timer. This can be used to prevent illegal
18 CO Dial Delay Timer
(2 Digits) (100ms) dialing in case of slow response from the Central
Office Line or PBX.
CO Release Guard 001 – 150 020 This timer controls the time necessary to guarantee
19
Timer (3 Digits) (100ms) idle loop state when the line is released.
This timer is to secure time interval between incoming
010 -150 060
20 CO Ring Off Timer ringing signals so that the active ringing can be lasted
(3 Digits) (100ms)
in the system until this timer is expired.
1–9 2 This timer controls the time necessary to detect an
21 CO Ring On Timer
(1 Digit) (100ms) outside line as ringing into the system.
Determines the amount of time before receiving
060 – 900 180
22 CO Warning Tone Timer warning tone in order to remind the call elapsed time
(3 Digits) (sec)
in case of outgoing CO line conversation (Only for Korea).
TABLE 6.1.1 Button Configuration for System Timers - I (PGM 180)
102
Admin Programming
6.2 SYSTEM TIMERS - II (PGM 181)
PROCEDURE

lit.)
CFW NO ANS TMR(sec) (3) To program the Call Forward No Answer Timer, press the Flex.
(000 – 255) : 015 BTN 1. The current status will be displayed on the LCD and
user can enter a desired value. Then LCD shows the changed
value

The Call Forward busy/no answer feature will occur
with this timer. If this timer has a non-zero value and
Call Forward No Answer 000 -255 015
1 an extension is set at busy, no answer forward by
station user then the extension will ring for this timer
and take place a forward to the next.
DID/DISA No Answer 00 -99 20 A DID call will be forwarded attendant if the station is
2
Timer (2 Digits) (sec) busy or does not answer within this time.
VMIB User Record 010 – 255 20
3 The time duration of VMIB user greeting
VMIB Valid User 0-9 4 The time duration of valid VMIB user message
4
Message Timer (1 Digits) (sec) In case of 0, No message can be recorded.
05 –99 20 Determines the length of time that is needed to
5 Door Open Timer
(2 Digits) (100ms) activate door open relay for the setting time.
Determines the amount of time programmed stations
00 -60 30
6 ICM Box Timer will ring when ICM box user presses the [CALL]
(2 Digits) (sec)
button.
01-20 10 If action is not taken within ICM dial tone timer, user
7 ICM Dial Tone Timer
(2 Digits) (sec) will hear error-tone.
01-20 The time between digits cannot exceed Inter-digit
8 Inter Digit Timer 05
(2 Digits) timer, or error tone is received.
Determines the amount of time between repeated
MSG Wait Reminder 00 -60
9 00 reminder tones to a key telephone with a message
Tone Timer (2 Digits)
waiting.
103
Admin Programming

Determines the maximum time of a page. The system
000 –255
10 Paging Timeout Timer 15 will automatically disconnect the page at the end of
(3 Digits)
this time unless the caller has hung up earlier.
1–9 Determines the length of the pause for use with
11 Pause Timer 3
(1 Digit) automatically sent digits or other speed dialing.
Determines the amount of time an outside line will ring
before being forwarded to a predetermined station.
Preset Call Forward 00 – 99
12 10 This entry works with Preset Forward Assignments in
Timer (2 Digits)
station attributes. More than one station can be
forwarded to the same destination.
TABLE 6.2.1 Button Configuration for System Timers - II (PGM 181)
104
Admin Programming
6.3 SYSTEM TIMERS - III (PGM 182)
PROCEDURE

lit.)
STA AUTO RLS TMR (sec) (3) To program the Station Auto Release Timer, press the Flex.
(020 – 300) : 060 BTN 5. The current status will be displayed on the LCD and
user can enter a desired value. Then LCD shows the changed
value.

SLT Hook Switch 01-25 01 Determines the length of time that is needed to
1
Bounce Timer (2 Digits) (100ms) regard as a valid on-hook or off-hook (for SLT).
Determines how long the user could depress the
SLT Maximum Hook 01-25 05
2 hook switch in order for it to be considered a FLASH
Flash Timer (2 Digits) (100ms)
(Timed-Break Recall) (for SLT).
SLT Minimum Hook 000 -250 020 The minimum bound time that system considers as
3
Flash Timer (3 Digits) (10ms) hook flash for SLT.
2–5 5 Determines the ring phase of SLT.
4 SLT Ring Phase Timer
(1 Digit) (sec) (5 SEC: 1SEC ON / 4SEC OFF)
If a station hears ring back tone and no action is
Station Auto Release 020 – 300 060
5 taken, this timer is assigned. When this timer is
expired, the station is released.
Determines the amount of the time an unsupervised
Unsupervised 00 - 99 10
6 conference can continue after the initiator of the
Conference Timer (2 Digits) (min)
conference has exited the conference.
After a Wake-up fail ring invokes on system
Wake-Up Fail Ring 00 - 99 20 attendant, the alarm ring exists during this timer.
7
Timer (2 Digits) (sec) Then if this timer expires, the alarm ring will be
disappeared.
User takes no action after lifting handset or pressing
010 - 200 05
8 Warm Line Timer the [MON] button and warm line timer is expired,
(2 Digits) (sec)
then idle line selection for warm line is activated.
010 -200 010 The time duration of seize acknowledge signal to
9 Wink Timer
(3 Digits) (10ms) DID line.
01-20 15
10 Enblock Digit timer After timer is expired, setup is sent.
(2 Digits) (sec)
11 CCR Time Out Timer 000-300 015(sec) When this timer is expired, CCR is activated.
12 DID Inter Digit Timer 01-20 03 In DID type2, used as digit timer
TABLE 6.3.1 Button Configuration for System Timers - III (PGM 182)
105
Admin Programming
7. DCOB ATTRIBUTE (PGM 186 - PGM 187)

7.1 DCOB SYS Attribute (PGM 186)
PROCEDURE
DCOB SYS ATTRIBUTE (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 186

PRESS FLEX KEY(01-12)
R2 OUT MANAG TMR(sec) (2) To program DCOB System Attribute, Press the Flex Btn 1-11.
(01 – 50) : 14 Related message will be displayed on LCD. (EX: Btn3)
R2 OUT MANAG TMR(sec) (3) To change the value, dial the value in the range (EX:30)
(01 – 50) : 30
R2 OUT MANAG TMR(sec) (4) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for saving database
(01 – 50) : 30 permanently.
DCOB SYS ATTRIBUTE z Press [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button, then
PRESS FLEX KEY(01-12) system goes to step (1) without updating system memory.

0:Sweden/Cyprus
1 DCOB CO Type 0-2 2 1:Italy
2:Korea/Australia
0:Not used
2 Metering Type 0-1 0
1:When received the Metering signal
In R2 signaling, maximum time for waiting for
3 R2 OUT Manage Timer 01-50 14
forward signal from PX (1 sec)
In R2 signaling, maximum time for waiting for
4 R2 IN Manage Timer 01-50 14
forward signal from PX (1 sec)
5 R2 Disappear Timer 01-50 14 1 sec
In R2 signaling, time duration to send pulse typed
6 R2 Pulse Timer 01-30 7
R2 signal (20 msec)
7 R2 Ready Timer 000-500 7 20 msec
8 Dial Tone Delay Timer 01-30 20
9 Line Status 1-9 6 Free Line
10 Calling Category 1-9 1 User no priority
11 DNIS Service ON/OFF OFF ON: Caller ID Service
12 CLI Digit Num 01-10 4 reserved
TABLE 7.1.1 DCOB System Attribute (PGM 186)
106
Admin Programming
7.2 DCOB CO Line Attribute (PGM 187)
PROCEDURE
DCOB COLINE ATTR (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 187.

ENTER COL RANGE
001-002 DCOB CO ATTR (2) Enter CO line range.

(3) To program, Press BTN 1-3 and enter related data for setting,
then entered data will be displayed on the LCD.
001-002 IN DGT TYPE (4) To assign Incoming Digit Type, press Flex. BTN 1 and dial
(0 – 2) : R2MFC Digit Type.(Ex: dial 2)
001-002 IN DGT TYPE (5) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
(0 – 2) : R2MFC permanently.
001-002 DCOB CO ATTR z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,

Default: R2MFC (2)
1 IN Digit Type 0-2 2 To set type.
[0 : PULSE, 1 : DTMF, 2 : R2MFC]
Default: R2MFC(2)
2 OUT Digit Type 0-2 2 To set type.
[0 : PULSE, 1 : DTMF, 2 : R2MFC]
3 CLI Digit Number 01-15 10 Set the digit numbers received for CLI
TABLE 7.2.1 DCOB CO Line Attribute (PGM 187)
107
Admin Programming
8. STATION GROUP PROGRAMMING (PGM 190 - PGM 191)

Stations in the system can be grouped so that incoming calls will search (hunt) for an idle station in the
group. Three hunting processes can be assigned; Circular, Terminal, or UCD (Uniform Call
Distribution). Each of the system's groups is assigned as a function; Call Pick-Up Group and/or Hunt
Group, Voice Mail Group, and Ring Group. The available group number and station number in a group
is as follows:
System LDK – 300 LDK – 100

No. of Group 48 15
STA No. in a Group 64 32
1. A station can belong to any number of Pickup groups, but can only belong to one Station Hunt
group, Voice mail group or Ring group.
2. When assigning a station group to any type of hunt group or voice mail group, ring, pick up group,
the system initializes hunt attributes by default value for it's own function. It can be programmed
to meet each customer's individual need.
108
Admin Programming
8.1 STATION GROUP ASSIGN (PGM 190)
PROCEDURE
STATION GRP ASSIGN (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 190. In LDK-100, the range is 620-634.
ENT HUNT NO (620 – 667)
STATION GRP 620 (2) Enter Station Group Number(Ex 620). Then user can set the
F1:TYPE F2:PKUP F3:MEM type, pick-up feature and member of the selected group. First,
press Flex. BTN 1 and set Type. (see TABLE 8.1.1)
STATION GRP 620 (3) To select Type, press one digit of 0 – 6 (Ex. 1).
NOT ASSIGNED (0-6)
STATION GRP 620 (4) To save, press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating
CIRCULAR GROUP (0-6) database.
GROUP 620 PICK-UP (5) To set pick_up feature of the Circular Group, press Flex. BTN 2
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF and enter the desired value.
STATION GRP 620 (6) To assign member of the Circular Group, press Flex. BTN 3.
F1:TYPE F2:PKUP F3:MEM
CIRCULAR 620 (7) Choose one of 4 Flex. BTNs, and enter station number step by
.... .... .... .... step or enter the station range (Ex: 100120).
STATION GRP 620 (8) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
F1:TYPE F2:PKUP F3:MEM permanently. User can set another group by going step (1).
STATION GRP 620 z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
F1:TYPE F2:PKUP F3:MEM then system goes to step (1) without updating system memory.
DGT ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

0: Not Assigned
1: Circular
2: Terminal
1 Group Type 0-6 0 3: UCD
4: Ring
5: VM
6: Pick up
2 Pick-up Attribute ON/OFF OFF OFF
3 Member assignment Not Assigned - First, group type should be assigned.
TABLE 8.1.1 Button Configuration for Station Group Type (PGM 190)
109
Admin Programming
8.2 STATION GROUP ATTRIBUTE (PGM 191)
8.2.1 CIRCULAR/TERMINAL GROUP ATTRIBUTE
The features of Terminal Group are same as that of Circular Group.
PROCEDURE
STATION GRP ASSIGN (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 191. In LDK-100, 620-634 is displayed.

ENT HUNT NO (620 – 667) Note: To program this, first, assign a station group to Circular/
Terminal hunt group by PGM 190.
CIRC GRP 621 (2) Enter Station Group Number (Ex. 621, If user sets 621 to
PRESS FLEX_KEY (01-13) Circular or Terminal group). Press one of 13 Flex. BTNs and
enter desired value of the group feature.
CIRC 621 ANNC 1 TMR (3) To assign VMIB Announce 1 Timer, press Flex. BTN 1 and
(000 - 999) : 015 enter three digits. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to save it.
CIRC 621 ANNC1 LOC (4) To assign VMIB Announce Location 1, press Flex. BTN 3 and
VMIB MSG … (00 – 70) enter two digits (VMIB Msg Number). Press the [HOLD/SAVE]
button to save it.
CIRC 621 ANNC1 LOC (5) To drop the call after VMIB announcement, dial digit ’#’. Press
VMIB MSG 065 (#) (00 – 70) the [HOLD/SAVE] button to save it.
CIRC 621 ANNC2 RPT TMR (6) To assign VMIB Announce 2 Repeat Timer, press Flex. BTN 5
(000 - 999) : 000 and enter three digits. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to save
it.
CIRC 621 OVFLOW DEST (7) To assign Overflow Destination, press Flex. BTN 7 and enter
STA/HUNT/VMIB (1-4) one digit.
z Dial ‘1’ to enter station number,
z Dial ‘2’ to enter Hunt group number,
z Dial ‘3’ to enter VMIB number
z Dial ‘4’ to enter SYS SPD number
z Press the [SPEED] button for deleting.
CIRC 621 OVERFLOW DEST z For example, enter digit 1, and enter the station number (Ex.
STA 105 105) as Overflow Destination. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button
to save it.
CIRC 621 OVERFLOW TMR (8) To assign Overflow Timer, press Flex. BTN 8 and enter three
(000 - 600) : 180 digits. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to save it.
CIRC 621 NO ANS TMR (9) To assign No Answer Timer, press Flex. BTN 10 and enter two
(00 – 99) : 15 digits (00-99). Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to save it.
CIRC 621 PILOT HUNT (10) To assign Pilot Hunt, press Flex. BTN 11 and enter desired
(1 : ON/ 0: OFF) : OFF value. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to save it.
CIRC 621 ALT IF NO MBR (11) To assign Alternative if No Member, press Flex. BTN 12 and
(1 : ON/ 0: OFF) : OFF enter desired value. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to save it.
110
Admin Programming
CIRC 621 MUSIC SRC (12) To assign Music Source, press Flex. BTN 13 and enter two
(00 – 12) : 00 digits. In LDK-100, the range is 00-11. Press the [HOLD/SAVE]
button to save it.
CIRC GRP 621 (13) Terminal Group feature is just same as Circular group. Press
PRESS FLEX_KEY (01-13) the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database permanently.
For another group’s setting, first assign type of group number
by PGM 190 and go step (1) and continue this process.
CIRC GRP 621 z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,

VMIB Announce 1 015 If this timer expires after a call is received in the group,
1 000-999
Timer (sec) the system announces the greeting if exists.
VMIB Announce 2 000 The second announcement can be provided if the call
2 000-999
Timer (sec) continues to wait beyond the 2nd announcement timer.
VMIB Announce 00 (Not This is used to announce greeting when the VMIB
3 00-70
Location 1 Assigned) announce 1 timer is expired.
VMIB Announce 00 (Not This is used to announce greeting when the VMIB
4 00-70
Location 2 Assigned) announce 2 timer is expired if assigned.
VMIB Announce 2 000 This is used to repeat VMIB announce 2 when the timer
5 000-999
Repeat (sec) is expired. (000: Not assigned)
VMIB Announce 2 This is used to enable or disable VMIB Announce 2
6 ON/OFF OFF
Repeat Enable/Disable Repeat.
STA #./ The call to a station in the group will continue to route
HUNT #./ until answered or each station in the group has been
7 Overflow Destination VMIB # / tried. The call will remain at the last station in the group
SYS SPD or will be passed to this overflow station/group/
# VMIB/System Speed bin.
180 If this timer expires after a call is received in the group,
8 Overflow Timer 000-600
(sec) the call is routed to the overflow destination.
A station in a hunt group is maintained in a busy state
002
9 Wrap-up Timer 002-999 for min. 2 seconds after any call and for hunt group
(sec)
calls for the assigned wrap-up time.
In circular/terminal hunt, calls to a station in the group
15 will go to the station, if unavailable or unanswered in
10 No Answer Timer 00-99
(sec) this no answer time, the call is directed to the next
station in the group.
A circular/terminal hunt group can be assigned with a
11 Pilot Hunt ON/OFF ON pilot number (the station group) so that only calls to the
pilot number will hunt.
If there is no member on duty, ICM call will be dropped
12 Alt If No Member ON/OFF OFF
or CO incoming call will be routed to ATD.
If music source is assigned, calling user will be heard
music instead of ring back tone.
00: Not assigned
00 (Not
13 Music Source 00-11(12) 01: Internal Music
Assigned)
02~04: External Music
5~6(7): VMIB BGM
7(8)-11(12): SLT MOH
TABLE 8.2.1.1 Button Configuration for Circular/Terminal Group Attribute (PGM 191)
111
Admin Programming
8.2.2 UCD GROUP ATTRIBUTE
PROCEDURE

ENT HUNT NO (620 – 667) Note: To program this, first, assign a station group to UCD hunt
group by PGM 190.
UCD GRP 623 (2) Enter Station Group Number (Ex 623, If user set 623 to UCD
PRESS FLEX_KEY (01-19) group at PGM 190). Press one of 19 Flex. BTNs and enter
desired value of the group feature.
UCD 623 ANNC 1 TMR (3) To assign VMIB Announce 1 Timer, press Flex. BTN 1 and
(000 – 999) : 000 enter three digits. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to save it.
UCD 623 ANNC1 LOC (4) To assign VMIB Announce Location 1, press Flex. BTN 3 and
VMIB MSG . . . (00 – 70) enter two digits (VMIB MSG Number). Press the [HOLD/SAVE]
button to save it.
UCD 623 ANNC2 RPT TMR (5) To assign VMIB Announce 2 Repeat, press Flex. BTN 5 and
(000 – 999) : 000 enter three digits. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to save it.
UCD 623 ACD WARN TONE (6) To assign ACD Warning Tone, press Flex. BTN 12 and enter
(1 : ON/ 0: OFF) : OFF desired value. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to save it.
UCD 623 ALTER DEST (7) To assign Alternate Destination, press Flex. BTN 14 and enter
(STA/HUNT) one digit.
z Dial '1' and enter station number,
z Dial ‘2’ and enter Hunt group number,
UCD 623 SUPERVISOR (8) To assign Supervisor, press Flex. BTN 17 and enter station
STA … number.
100 110 123 124 (9) To assign UCD priority, press Flex. BTN 18 and press Flex.
0 0 0 0 BTN 1-4 to enter the priority (0 – 9).
UCD GRP 623 (10) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
PRESS FLEX_KEY (01-19) permanently. For another group’s setting, first assign the type of
the group number by PGM 190 and go step (1) and continue
this process.
UCD GRP 623 z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
112
Admin Programming

If all stations in the group are busy when a call is received
for the group, the call may continue to wait (queue) for an
available station in the group. If queued, the call may be
VMIB Announce 1 000 – 999 015
1 sent to a UCD announcement when the queue period
exceeds the 1st announcement Timer. If the timer is set to
0 the call will receive the full first announcement prior to
the hunting process (guaranteed announcement).
VMIB Announce 2 000 - 999 000 The second announcement can be provided if the call
2
Timer (3 Digits) (sec) continues to wait beyond the 2nd announcement timer.
Each station hunt group can be assigned an
VMIB Announce 00 (Not
3 00-70 announcement, which is played when the call is first
Location 1 Assigned)
received. The announcement may be assigned as VMIB.
VMIB Announce 00 (Not The second announcement can be provided after VMIB
4 00-70
Location 2 Assigned) Announce 2 Timer.
VMIB Announce 2 000 This is used to announce VMIB announce 2 when the
5 000-999
Repeat (sec) timer is expired.
VMIB Announce 2
This is used to enable or disable VMIB Announce 2
6 Repeat ON/OFF OFF
Repeat.
Enable/Disable
STA #./ The queued call may be taken out of the group and
Overflow STA Grp #/ directed to an overflow destination (Station/Hunt/VMIB/
7 -
Destination VMIB# / System Speed bin).
SYS SPD #
000 - 600 180 If this timer expires after a call is received in the group, the
8 Overflow Timer
(3 Digits) (sec) call is routed to the overflow destination.
9 A station in a hunt group is maintained in a busy state for
002 - 999 002
Wrap-up Timer min. 2 seconds after any call for the assigned wrap-up
(3 Digits) (sec)
time.
If there is no member on duty, ICM call will be dropped or
10 Alt If No Member ON/OFF OFF
CO incoming call will be routed to ATD
If music source is assigned, calling user will be heard
music instead of ring back tone.
00: Not assigned
11 Music Source 00-11(12) 00 01: Internal Music
5~6(7): VMIB BGM
7(8)-11(12): SLT MOH
ACD Warning Determines that the ACD supervisor monitors an agent
12 ON/OFF ON
Tone with warning tone or without warning tone
When a call is received in the group and there is no
Alternate STA No/
13 - available station in the group, then the call will be routed
destination HUNT #
to this destination if assigned.
When the queued timer is longer than this timer, the
000 – 999 030
14 Supervisor Timer number of queued lines will be displayed onto supervisor's
(3 Digits) (sec)
LCD.
Supervisor Call 00 - 99 If the number of queued calls is more than this call count,
15 00
Count (2 Digits) the supervisor timer will be started.
16 ACD Queued Call ON/OFF OFF Show the number of queued call to supervisor keyset
17 Max Que Call Cnt 00-99 00
18 Supervisor STA # - Station No. of Supervisor
UCD hunt 0-9
19 0 UCD group member's priority
Stations' Priority (1 Digit)
TABLE 8.2.2.1 Button Configuration for UCD Group Attribute (PGM 191)
113
Admin Programming
8.2.3 RING GROUP ATTRIBUTE
PROCEDURE
STATION GRP ASSIGN (1) TRANS/PGM] + 191. In LDK-100, 620-634 is displayed.

ENT HUNT NO (620 – 667) Note: To program this, first, assign a station group to Ring hunt
group by PGM 190.
RING GRP 624 (2) Enter Station Group Number (Ex. 624, If user set 624 to Ring
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-10) group). Press one of 10 Flex. BTNs and enter desired value of
the group feature.
RING 624 ANNC 1 TMR (3) To assign VMIB Announce 1 Timer, press Flex. BTN 1 and
(000 – 999) : 015 enter three digits.
RING 624 ANNC1 LOC (4) To assign VMIB Announce Location 1, press BTN 3 and enter
VMIB MSG . . . ( 00 – 70 ) VMIB number. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to save it.
RING 624 ANNC 2 RPT (5) To assign VMIB Announce 2 Repeat E/D, choose flex BTN 6
(1 : ON/ 0: OFF) : OFF and enter desired value. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to
save it.
RING 624 MUSIC SRC (6) To assign Music Source, choose flex BTN 10 and enter two
(00 – 12) : 00 digits. In LDK-100, the range is 00-11. Press the [HOLD/SAVE]
button to save it.
RING GRP 624 (7) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-10) permanently. For another group’s setting, first assign type of a
group number by PGM 190 and go step (1) and continue this
process.
RING GRP 624 z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
114
Admin Programming

VMIB Announce 1 015 If this timer expires after a call is received in the
1 000-999
Timer (sec) group, the system announces the greeting if exists.
The second announcement can be provided if the
VMIB Announce 2 000
2 000-999 call continues to wait beyond the 2nd announcement
Timer (sec)
timer.
VMIB Announce 00 (Not This is used to announce the greeting when the
3 00-70
Location 1 Assigned) VMIB announce 1 timer is expired.
VMIB Announce 00 (Not This is used to announce the greeting when the
4 00-70
Location 2 Assigned) VMIB announce 2 timer is expired.
VMIB Announce 2 000 This is used to announce the greeting 2 when the
5 000-999
Repeat (sec) timer is expired. (1 Sec Base)
VMIB Announce 2 This is used to enable or disable VMIB Announce 2
6 Repeat Enable/ ON/OFF OFF Repeat.
Disable
The call to a station in the group will continue to
STA#./
route until answered or each station in the group has
HUNT#/
7 Overflow Destination been tried. The call will remain at the last station in
VMIB# /
the group or will be passed to this overflow
SYS SPD #
destination (Station/Hunt/VMIB/System Speed bin).
180 If this timer expires after a call is received in the
8 Overflow Timer 000-600
(sec) group, the call is routed to the overflow destination.
A station in a hunt group is maintained in a busy
002-999 002
9 Wrap Up Timer state for min. 2 seconds after any call for the
(3 digits) (sec)
assigned wrap-up time.
If music source is assigned, calling user will be
heard music instead of ring back tone.
00: Not assigned
10 Music Source 00-11(12) 00 01: Internal Music
5~6(7): VMIB BGM
7(8)-11(12): SLT MOH
11 Max. Queued Call 00-99 00 Maximum number of queued call in the ring group
Count
TABLE 8.2.3.1 Button Configuration for Ring Group Attribute (PGM 191)
115
Admin Programming
8.2.4 VM GROUP ATTRIBUTE
PROCEDURE

ENT HUNT NO (620 – 667) Note : To program this, first, assign a station group to VM group by
PGM 190.
VM GRP 626 (2) Enter Station Group number (Ex. 626, If user sets 626 to VM
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-7) group). Press one of 7 Flex. BTNs and enter desired value of
the group feature.
VM 626 WRAP UP TMR (3) To assign Wrap-up Timer, press Flex. BTN 1 and enter three
(006 – 999) : 002 digits. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to save it.
VM 626 PUT MAIL INDEX (4) To assign Put Mail Index, press Flex. BTN 2 and enter one digit
(1 – 4) : 1 (1-4). Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to save it.
VM 626 HUNT TYPE (5) To assign Hunt Type, press Flex. BTN 4 and enter desired
(1 : CIRC/ 0 : TERM) : TERM value. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to save it.
VM 626 OVERFLOW DEST (6) To assign Overflow Destination, press Flex. BTN 7 and enter
STA/HUNT/VMIB (1-4) one digit.
z Dial ‘1’ to enter station number,
z Dial ‘2’ to enter Hunt group number,
z Dial ‘3’ to enter VMIB number,
z Dial ‘4’ to enter System Speed number.
VM 626 OVERFLOW DEST z For example, dial 1 and enter station number 147.
STA 147 Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to save it.
VM GRP 626 (7) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
process.
VM GRP 626 z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
116
Admin Programming

A station in a hunt group is maintained in a busy
002-999 002
1 Wrap-up Timer state for min. 2 seconds after any call and for
(3 Digits) (sec)
hunt group calls for the assigned wrap-up time.
2 Put Mail Index 1 -4 1 This index is one of the voice mail dialing tables
3 Get Mail Index 1 -4 2 This index is one of the voice mail dialing tables
1: Circular Hunt Group
4 Hunt Type CIRC /TERM TERM
0: Terminal Hunt Group
01-13 (LDK-300) 02 (LDK-300)
5 SMDI Port
01-11 (LDK-100) 01 (LDK-100)
If this timer expires after a call is received in the
000 -600 180
6 Overflow Timer group, the call is routed to the overflow
(3 Digits) (sec)
destination.
The call to the group will continue to be reroute
STA #/
until reaching the last station in the group where
Overflow HUNT #/
7 - the call will remain or can be sent to this
Destination VMIB# /
overflow destination (Station/Hunt group/VMIB/
SYS SPD #
System Speed bin).
TABLE 8.2.4.1 Button Configuration for Voice Mail Group Attribute (PGM 191)
117
Admin Programming
8.2.5 PICK-UP GROUP ATTRIBUTE
PROCEDURE

ENT HUNT NO (620 – 667) Note: To program this, first, assign a station group to Pick Up group
by PGM 190.
PICK UP GRP 625 (2) Enter Station Group number (Ex. 625, If user sets 625 to Pick-
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-2) up group). Press one of 2 Flex BTNs and enter desired value of
the group feature.
PICK UP 625 AUTO PICK UP (3) To assign Auto Pick-up, press Flex. BTN 1 and enter desired
(1 : ON/ 0: OFF) : OFF value. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to save it.
PICK UP 625 ALL RING (4) To assign All Ring, press Flex. BTN 2 and enter desired value.
(1 : ON/ 0: OFF) : OFF Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to save it.
PICK UP GRP 625 (5) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
process.
PICK UP GRP 625 z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
BTN ITEM RANGE DEFAULT (LED) REMARK

If a hunt member is ringing, another hunt member can
1 Auto Pickup ON/OFF OFF pickup the call automatically only by pressing [MON]
button or off-hook.
When a hunt member that is Tone mode is ringing, all
2 All Ring ON/OFF OFF other stations are ringing also. Auto Pickup feature
must be set before All Ring is set.
TABLE 8.2.5.1 Button Configuration for Pick-up Group Attribute (PGM 191)
118
Admin Programming
9. ISDN PROGRAM
If ISDN system parameters are to be changed, press the [TRANS/PGM] button and dial 200-202.
When programming, LCD and LEDs indicate current programmed data and programming status. The
as LCD/LEDs show their status) are stored into permanent ISDN memory.
9.1 ISDN ATTRIBUTE (PGM 200)
PROCEDURE
SYSTEM ISDN ATT (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 200. If user wants to program the ISDN
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-10) system attributes press one of Flex. BTNs of 1-7.
ADVICE OF CHARGE (0-6) (2) To program AOC type, press the Flex. BTN 1 and dial one
FINLAND(2) digit. Then the current status will be displayed on the LCD.
CO ATD CODE (2DGT) (3) To program the CO Attendant code, press the Flex. BTN 2
.. and dial max. 2 digits.
IN PREFIX CODE INS (4) To program the Incoming Prefix Code Insertion, press the
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF Flex. BTN 3. Then the current status will be displayed on the
LCD.
ISDN LINE TYPE (5) To select ISDN Line Type, press the Flex. BTN 5 and dial 0
(1:U/0:A): A_LAW or 1. (1: μ-LAW 0: A-LAW)
INTERNATION ACC CODE (6) To program the International Access Code, press the Flex.
001 BTN 7. Then the current status will be displayed on the LCD.
To change the data, dial the desired value (Max. 4 digits).
SYSTEM ISDN ATT (7) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
SYSTEM ISDN ATT z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE]
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-10) button, then system goes to step (1) without updating system
memory.
119
Admin Programming

0: Do not service AOC
1: Italy and Spain
2: Finland
1 Advice of Charge 0-6 0 3: Australia
4: Belgium
5: Standard
6: Netherlands
According to PGM114 – BTN 5, CO ATD code or
Max. 2
2 CO ATD Code - station number can be contained to CLI, COLP
Digits
message.
Incoming prefix code If this field is ON, prefix code will be attached in
3 ON/OFF OFF(NO)
Insertion front of incoming phone number.
Outgoing prefix code If this field is ON, prefix code will be attached in
4 ON/OFF ON (YES)
Insertion front of outgoing phone number.
μ-Law/ A-Law
5 ISDN Line Type Installed ISDN Back bone type
A-Law (OFF)
If this field is ON, the CLI will be sent to RS-232C
6 CLI print ON/OFF OFF (NO)
port regardless setting the CLIP.
International Access Max. 4
7 - International Access Code Assign
Code Digits
8 Calling Sub-address ON/OFF OFF (NO)
Max. 6
9 My Area Code - Local area code
Digits
Max. 4
10 My Area Prefix Code - Prefix code of local area code
Digits
TABLE 9.1.1 ISDN Attributes (PGM 200)
120
Admin Programming
9.2 COLP TABLE (PGM 201)
PROCEDURE
COLP TABLE ENTRY (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 201.

ENTER BIN NO ( 00 – 49 )
COLP TABLE 05 (2) To program COLP table, dial Bin No (00 – 49).
……….
COLP TABLE ENTRY (3) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
ENTER BIN NO ( 00 – 49 ) permanently.
COLP TABLE ENTRY z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE]
ENTER BIN NO ( 00 – 49 ) button, then system goes to step (1) without updating system
memory.
BTN ITEM DEFAULT RANGE REMARK

In CO PGM part, PGM 143-BTN1, BTN3 indicate an
COLP - Max. 10 digits
entry of this COLP table index.
TABLE 9.2.1 COLP Table (PGM 201)
121
Admin Programming
9.3 MSN TABLE (PGM 202)
PROCEDURE
MSN TABLE ATT (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 202.

ENTER BIN NO ( 000 – 249 )
MSN TABLE 125 (2) To enter MSN table, dial the digits (Ex. 125).
PRESS FLEX_KEY ( 1 – 4 )
MSN TABLE 125 (3) To enter CO line number, press Flex. BTN 1 and the dial digits
COL NO : 001 (Ex. 001).
MSN TABLE 125 (4) To enter index number of PGM 231, press Flex. BTN 2, and
INDEX : 100 dial the index number (Ex. 100).
MSN TABLE 125 (5) To enter Sub-address number, press Flex. BTN 3, and dial
SUB NO : 1 Sub-address number (Ex. 1).
TABLE 125 MSN NUMBER (6) To enter Incoming MSN telephone number, press Flex. BTN 4
…………………….. and dial MSN number that is provided by PX.
MSN TABLE ATT (7) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
ENTER BIN NO ( 000 – 249 ) permanently.
MSN TABLE ATT z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
ENTER BIN NO ( 000 – 249 ) then system goes to step (1) without updating system memory.

001-200 (LDK-300)
1 CO Line No. None
01-40 (LDK-100)
If Incoming CO line number and MSN
Index of Flexible number are matched or only MSN number
2 000-999 None
DID Table is matched with Table entry, it will follow the
assigned Flexible DID Table.
3 Sub Number 0-9 None MSN Subscriber number
4 MSN Number 20 Digits None ISDN Incoming MSN number
TABLE 9.3.1 Button Configuration of MSN Table (PGM 202)
122
Admin Programming
10. LCR
To program LCR, press the [TRANS/PGM] button and dial 220 - 223. There are 4 parts in the LCR
table. User can program general database, LCR access mode, day zone and time zone by PGM 220.
PGM 221 is for Leading Digit Table and PGM 222 is for Digit Modification Table. The stored database
for LCR may be initialized by PGM 223.
10.1 LCR ATTRIBUTES (PGM 220)
PROCEDURE
LCR CONTROL ATTRIBUTES (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 220.

LCR ACCESS MODE (1-6) (2) Flex BTN 1: Change LCR access mode
(M00) DISABLE LCR Dialing digit 1-6, the LCD will show the changed value M00,
M01, M02, M11, M12 or M13. See the Table 10.1.1.
LCR ACCESS MODE (1-6) z For example, dial 3 and press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to
(M02) INT AND LOOP LCR save the changed data.
DAY ZN 1:1234567 2: 3: (3) Flex BTN 2: Set the day-of-week zone

M1 T2 W3 T4 F5 SA6 SU7 To set the day zone, dial the associated zone number
following the Flex. BTN related with weekday. (BTN 1 for MON,
BTN 2 for TUE, BTN 3 for WED, etc.)
For example, if you want to set Saturday as zone 2, then press
BTN 6, dial 2 and press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
DAY ZN 1:123457 2:6 3: z Confirmation tone is heard and the LCD will be changed.
MON : ZONE 3 (1–3 ) Ex) To set the Monday as zone 3, press BTN 1. LCD shows
current zone of Monday. And dial the desired zone 3. The
changed value will be displayed on the LCD.
DAY ZN 1:23457 2:6 3:1 z Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button. Confirmation tone is heard
M1 T2 W3 T4 F5 SA6 SU7 and LCD will be changed.
TIME ZONE 1 (4) Flex BTN 3: Set the time-of-day zone 1

1:00-24 2: . .-. . 3: . .-. .
TOD1 (24HOUR FORM) z To enter value, choose the zone by pressing Flex. BTN and dial
1:00-24 2:..-.. 3:..-.. the time range (BTN1 for zone 1, BTN 2 for zone 2, BTN 3 for
zone 3).
For example, if you want to set time zone as Zone 1: 08-18
Zone 2: 18-24 Zone 3: 24-08, then, press BTN 1, dial 0818
and press the [HOLD/SAVE] button, BTN 2, dial 1824 and
[HOLD/SAVE] button, and press BTN 3, dial 2408, and
[HOLD/SAVE] button.
123
Admin Programming
TOD1 (24HOUR FORM) z Pressing the [HOLD/SAVE] button, LCD will be changed in
1:08-18 2:18-24 3:..-.. order with confirmation tone.
TIME ZONE 2 (5) Flex BTN 4: Set the time-of-day zone 2

1:00-24 2: . .-. . 3: . .-. .
TOD1 (24HOUR FORM) z To enter value, choose zone by pressing Flex. BTN and dial the
1:00-24 2:..-.. 3:..-.. time range.
TIME ZONE 3 (6) Flex BTN 5: Set the time-of-day zone 3. To enter value, choose
1:00-24 2: . .-. . 3: . .-. . zone by pressing Flex. BTN and dial the time range.
LCR CONTROL ATTRIBUTES z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,

LCR Access Mode 00 (M00): Disable LCR
LCR Access Mode 01 (M01): only Loop LCR.
LCR Access Mode 02 (M02): Internal and Loop
LCR.
Disable LCR Access Mode 11 (M11) : Loop and Direct
1 LCR Access M00/01/02/11/12/13
(M00) CO LCR
LCR Access Mode 12 (M12): Internal, Loop and
Direct CO LCR
LCR Access Mode 13 (M13): Internal, Loop,
Direct CO and Direct Loop LCR
Zone : 3 Belongs to
2 Day Zone First, select day and choose zone
Day : 1 - 7 Zone 1
LDK accepts it as same value for 00 and 24 and
changes to “00”, if input is 24 as starting value and
3 Belongs to vice versa.
Time Zone Time : 00 – 24
Zone 1 *Note : The time not belonging to any zone will be
considered as zone 1
*Note : 10 - 13 means 10:00:00 - 12:59:59
TABLE 10.1.1 LCR Table (PGM 220)
124
Admin Programming
10.2 LEADING DIGIT TABLE (PGM 221)
PROCEDURE
LDT TABLE (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 221. Dial bin number 000 – 249. (000 means
ENTER LDT BIN (000) that LDT is empty.)
000 BOTH CD: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2) Program the Leading Digit Table

DMT: . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... Press BTN 1 to select one of BOTH, INT, COL.
CD: Dial the leading digits following BTN 2
DMT (dependent to day/time zone)
For Day zone 1 : Press BTN 3 and 6 digits
(6 digits: each pair (2 digits) means the index to the DMT for the
each time zone 1/2/3)
For Day zone 2: Press BTN 4 and 6 digits
For Day zone 3: Press BTN 5 and 6 digits
(The [SPEED] button is used to erase the entered data in BTN
2, BTN 3 BTN 4 and BTN 5. Press the [SPEED] button and
press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to erase the data.)
Note:
1. If the entered data is correct, system will sort the data set by
some criteria. (Code/LCR Type/DMT Index) So, when user
programs PGM 221 to enter LDT values, the first available bin
will be displayed.
2. When user enters data, the updated data will be displayed on
the LCD. But the time that actually LDK system accepts and
sort the data is when the condition (described in Note.1) is
satisfied.
3. The modified one may be stored into a different bin, since LDK
ascending sort for the faster lookup.
4. Refer to the Index of DMT (See the Table 9.2.1)
LDT 000 : LCR TYPE (3) Flex BTN 1: Change LCR access mode
LCR MODE : COL (3) Dial one digit 1-3 to select INT(1), COL(2) or BOTH(3).
Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to save the changed data.
000 COL CD: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . z Confirmation tone is heard and updated data will be displayed
DMT: . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... on the LCD.
LDT 000 : LCR CODE (4) Flex BTN 2: Dial Leading digits
1234567 Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to save the changed data.
000 BOTH CD: 1234567E z Confirmation tone is heard and updated data will be displayed
DMT: . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... on the LCD.
LDT 000 : DAY ZONE 1 DMT (5) Flex BTN 3: Set the time-of-day zone 1 To enter each time zone
INDEX(6DGT): .. .. .. (1/2/3), dial 6 digits continuously.
125
Admin Programming
LDT 000 : DAY ZONE 1 DMT z Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to update the data.
INDEX(6DGT): 00 99 55
DMT: 009955 ...... ...... on the LCD.
LDT 000 : DAY ZONE 2 DMT (6) Flex BTN 4: Set the time-of-day zone 2
INDEX(6DGT): .. .. .. To enter each time zone (1/2/3), dial 6 digits continuously.
INDEX(6DGT): 12 34 56
DMT: 009955 123456 ...... on the LCD.
LDT 000 : DAY ZONE 2 DMT (7) Flex BTN 5: Set the time-of-day zone 3
INDEX(6DGT): .. .. .. To enter each time zone (1/2/3), dial 6 digits continuously.
INDEX(6DGT): 22 33 44
DMT: 009955 123456 223344 on the LCD.
011 BOTH CD: 1234567E Note: When pressing the [HOLD/SAVE] button in individual
DMT: 009955 123456 223344 program mode, if system already has LDT data sets and input data
can be accepted and sorted, the system will return another bin after
sorting the data set.
LDT TABLE z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
ENTER LDT BIN (000) then system goes to step (1) without updating system memory.

INT: look up this entry only for internal dialing
(1) INT
COL: look up this entry only after dialing CO
1 LCR Type (2) COL BOTH
Access Code
(3) BOTH
BOTH: look up this entry for both INT and COL.
2 CD 12 digits None To be compared with the dialed digits by user.
3 Day Zone 1, 2, 3 has 3 time zone DMT index (6
DMT index 00 - 99 None
digits)
TABLE 10.2.1 Leading Digit Table (PGM221)
126
Admin Programming
10.3 DIGIT MODIFICATION TABLE (PGM 222)
PROCEDURE
DMT TABLE (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 222. Dial bin number 00 – 99

ENTER DMT BIN (00-99)
55 A: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A (Added digit stream)

RP01 NR00 AP01 CG01 AD . . Dial the digit stream following BTN 1.
RP (Removal Position)
Dial xx following BTN 2.
RN (Removal Number of digits of code in each table)
AP (Add Position)
CG (CO group)
Dial CO group xx following BTN 5.
AD (Alternative DMT index)
Dial xx following BTN 6. (See Table 9.3.1)
DMT 55 : ADDED DGT (2) Flex BTN 1: Set the Added digit stream
........................
DMT 55 : ADDED DGT z Dial digits (to 25 digits)

1234567890 To erase the entered data, press the [SPEED] button.
Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to update the changed data.
55 A: 1234567890E z Confirmation tone is heard and updated data will be displayed

RP01 NR00 AP01 CG01 AD . . on the LCD.
DMT 55 REMOVAL POSITION (3) Flex BTN 2: Set the Removal Position
(01-12) : 01 Dial 2 digits (01-12).
55 A: 1234567890E z For example, dial 10 and press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.

RP10 NR00 AP01 CG01 AD . . Confirmation tone is heard and updated data will be displayed
on the LCD.
DMT 55 NUM OF REMOVE (4) Flex BTN 3: Set the Removal Number of digits of code in each
DIGITS (01-12) : 00 table. Dial 2 digits (01-12).
55 A: 1234567890E z For example, dial 07, and press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
on the LCD.
DMT 55 ADD POSITION (5) Flex BTN 4: Set the Add Position
(01-13) : 01 Dial 2 digits (01-13).
127
Admin Programming
on the LCD.
DMT 55 CO GROUP (6) Flex BTN 5: Set the CO group. In LDK-100, the range is 01-24.
(01-72) : 01 Dial 2 digits.
on the LCD.
DMT 55 ALT INDEX (7) Flex BTN 6: Set the Alternative DMT index.
(00-99) : .. Dial 2 digits (00-99).
RP10 NR07 AP05 CG10 AD 77 Confirmation tone is heard and updated data will be displayed
on the LCD.
DMT TABLE z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
ENTER DMT BIN (00-99) then system goes to step (1) without updating system memory.
z To erase the value in every step, press the [SPEED] button
and press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.

Normal digits (0 .. 9, * , #)
Special characters
Added Digit 20 digits [CALLBK]: Pause
1 None
Stream [DND/FOR]: Dial-tone-detection instead of
pause
[FLASH]: Billing code (Station Number)
2 Removal Position 01-12 01 Index to CD stream in Lead table to be removed
Number of digits Removes digits in CD stream up to this count.
3 00-12 00
to be removed
Determines the position of CD stream after
4 Add Position 01-13 01
removal, where the stream will be inserted.
01-72 (LDK-300) 01 Determines which CO group is used for LCR
5 CO Group
01-24 (LDK-100) dialing
Alternative Determines alternative DMT index when there is
6 00-99 None
DMT Index no idle CO line in the CO group.
TABLE 10.3.1 Digit Modification Table (PGM222)
128
Admin Programming
10.4 LCR TABLE INITIALIZATION (PGM 223)
PROCEDURE
INITIALIZE LCR DB (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 223.

ENTER DMT INIT VAL(6) (2) Flex. BTN 1: Initialize all DMT index of Day Zone 1 in LDT.
DAY ZONE 1: .. .. ..
ENTER DMT INIT VAL(6) z Dial 6 digits continuously. And press the [HOLD/SAVE] button
DAY ZONE 1: 00 11 22 to initialize the data.
INITIALIZE LCR DB z Confirmation tone will be heard and the system goes to
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-6) previous menu.
ENTER DMT INIT VAL(6) (3) Flex. BTN 2: Initialize all DMT index of Day Zone 2 in LDT.
DAY ZONE 2: .. .. ..
ENTER DMT INIT VAL(6) (4) Flex BTN 3: Initialize all DMT index of Day Zone 3 in LDT.
DAY ZONE 3: .. .. ..
ENTER CO GRP INIT VAL (5) Flex BTN 4: Initialize all CO group of DMT.
..
ENTER CO GRP INIT VAL z Dial 2 digits(01-72 in LDK-300, 01-24 in LDK-100). (Ex. Dial 23)
23 And press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to initialize the data
ENTER ALT INDEX INIT VAL (6) Flex BTN 5: Initialize alternative DMT index.
..
ENTER ALT INDEX INIT VAL z Dial two digits (00-99). (Ex. Dial 77)
77 And press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to initialize the data
129
Admin Programming
INITIALIZE ALL LCR ? (7) Flex BTN 6: Initialize all LCR.

Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to initialize all LCR.
INITIALIZE LCR DB z All LCR database are set to default values. Confirmation tone
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-6) will be heard and the system goes to previous menu.
INITIALIZE LCR DB z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
z To erase the value in every step, press the [SPEED] button
and press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
130
Admin Programming
11. TOLL TABLE

To program Toll Tables, press the [TRANS/PGM] button and dial 224 - 226. Toll tables are used to
have access to certain toll free calls as well as being denied certain calls for the stations assigned
Station COS. Exception table A & B allow the station that is programmed in STA COS 2, 3 & 4 to have
access to certain toll free calls as well as being denied certain calls.
11.1 TOLL EXCEPTION TABLE (PGM 224)
The Allow/Deny Tables are organized into 2 sets of tables to support 2 different toll plans at one
installed site. Each allow/deny table may contain up to 30 number strings. All bins of allow and deny
tables have no entries by default. Each number string can contain up to 14 entries including any
number 0-9, *, #, "Don't care".
The following rules should be remembered when setting up the Allow/Deny Tables:
(1) If the tables have no entries, no restriction is applied.
(2) If entries are made in the allow table and only there, then only those numbers are allowed.
(3) If entries are made in the deny table and only there, then only those numbers are denied.
(4) If there are entries in both tables, the allow table is searched at first and if number is found, it is
allowed. If not found, the deny table is searched and if number is found, it is denied. If it is not
found in either table, it is allowed.
ENTRY CONDITIONS & RESULT

RULE
ALLOW DENY ALLOW TABLE DENY TABLE
1 Not Exist Not Exist No Restriction No Restriction
Found - allowed
2 Exist Not Exist -
Not found - denied
Found - denied
3 Not Exist Exist -
Not found - allowed
Found - allowed Found - denied
4 Exist Exist
Not found – check deny table Not Found - allowed
TABLE 11.1.1 Allow/Deny Rules (PGM 224)
131
Admin Programming
PROCEDURE
TOLL EXCEPTION TABLES (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 224.

(2) To program Toll Exception Tables, use the Flex. BTNs as
TABLE 11.1.2.
ALLOW TABLE A (3) Press a Flex. BTN to program a table. (Ex. Press BTN 1: Allow
ENTER BIN NO (01-30) Table A)
ALLOW TABLE A (4) Dial bin number. Refer to TABLE 10.1.3 and enter data. Each
BIN 01: .............. entry can be entered up to 14 digits
(5) To delete exception number, press the [SPEED] button and the
[HOLD/SAVE] button.
ALLOW TABLE A (6) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
ENTER BIN NO (01-30) permanently.
ALLOW TABLE A z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
ENTER BIN NO (01-30) then system goes to step (1) without updating system memory.
BTN ITEM ENTRY DEFAULT REMARK

1 ALLOW A 01 – 30 - Max 14 digits
2 DENY A 01 – 30 - Max 14 digits
3 ALLOW B 01 – 30 - Max 14 digits
4 DENY B 01 – 30 - Max 14 digits
TABLE 11.1.2 Button Configuration for Toll Tables (PGM 224)
VALID DATA FUNCTION LCD DISPLAY

0 - 9, *, # Numbers as dialed
[DND/FWD] Don’t Care 'D'
TABLE 11.1.3 Data Entry of Toll Table (PGM 224)
132
Admin Programming
11.2 CANNED TOLL TABLE (PGM 225)
In addition to the basic toll restrictions, stations with a COS 5 or 6 are subject to dial restrictions based
on the “Canned” Allow and Deny Tables. This program permits entries in the Canned Toll Tables. Both
the Allow and Deny table have 20 bins up to 14 digits.
PROCEDURE
CANNED TOLL TABLES (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 225.

(2) To program Canned Toll Tables, use the BTNs as TABLE
11.2.1.
ALLOW TABLE (3) Press a Flex. Button to program a table. (Ex. Press BTN 1:
ENTER BIN NO (01-20) Allow Table)
ALLOW TABLE (4) Dial bin number. Refer to TABLE 10.2.2 and enter data. Each
BIN 01: .............. entry can be up to 14 digits.
z To delete the number, press the [SPEED] button and the

[HOLD/SAVE] button.
ALLOW TABLE (5) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
ALLOW TABLE z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,

1 ALLOW 01 – 20 - Max. 14 digits
2 DENY 01 – 20 - Max. 14 digits
TABLE 11.2.1 Button Configuration for Canned Toll Table (PGM 225)
VALID DATA FUNCTION LCD DISPLAY

0 - 9, *, # Number as dialed
[DND/FWD] Don’t Care 'D'
TABLE 11.2.2 Data Entry of Canned Toll Table (PGM 225)
133
Admin Programming
11.3 EMERGENCY CODE TABLE (PGM 226)
The emergency code table is used for emergency call service. All stations, regardless of COS, can dial
the emergency codes in this table.
PROCEDURE
EMERGENCY SVC CALL (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 226.

ENTER BIN NO (01 - 10)
EMERGENCY SVC CALL (2) Dial 2 digits of 01-10. (Ex. 01)

BIN 01: ..............
EMERGENCY SVC CALL (3) To assign emergency call number, dial the desired digits.
BIN 01: 00119 (Ex. 00119)
EMERGENCY SVC CALL (4) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
BIN 01: 00119 permanently.
EMERGENCY SVC CALL z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
ENTER BIN NO (01 - 10) then system goes to step (1) without updating system memory.

1 Emergency Code Table 01 – 10 - Max digit: 14
TABLE 11.3.1 Button Configuration for Emergency Code Table (PGM 226)
134
Admin Programming
12. TABLES
To program TABLES, press the [TRANS/PGM] button and dial 227 - 235.
12.1 AUTHORIZATION CODE TABLE (PGM 227)
Trunk groups can be marked to deny access until a matched Authorization code is entered. In this
case, DND warning tone is provided when the trunk group access code is dialed. If the dialed
Authorization code is verified, you will hear CO dial tone. Otherwise, you will hear error tone and
cannot access the group. The authorization codes can be entered by stations or admin programming.
Authorization code is fixed 5 digits. Administrator can see and change station's password. There can
be no duplicate entries. By default, Authorization Codes are not assigned at all. In LDK-300(100)
system, the total number of Authorization Codes is 600(164) entries.
PROCEDURE
AUTHOR CODE (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 227. In LDK-100, 001-164 is displayed.

ENTER BIN NO (001 - 600)
AUTHOR CODE (2) Enter entry number of authorization code. (Ex. 001) LCD shows
001 : ..... current assigned Authorization code.
AUTHOR CODE (3) To assign authorization code, enter 5-digits code. If there are
001 : 12345 no code duplication in the system, then entered code will be
displayed on the LCD, otherwise error tone will be given. To
delete authorization code, press the [SPEED] button. (Ex.
12345)
AUTHOR CODE (4) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
ENTER BIN NO (001 -600) permanently.
AUTHOR CODE z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
ENTER BIN NO (001 -600) then system goes to step (1) without updating system memory.
135
Admin Programming
12.2 CUSTOM CALL ROUTING (PGM 228)
PROCEDURE
CUSTOM CALL ROUTING (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 228.

SELECT CCR TABLE (01-70) To select CCR Table number, dial 01~70.
CUSTOM CALL ROUTING : 01 (2) To select each entry number of CCR table, press Flex. BTN
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-10) 1~10, then the entered data will be displayed on the LCD.
CUSTOM CALL ROUTING : 01 (3) To program call routing destination, dial destination type as
INPUT 1 : ... follow;
1 – STA
2 – HUNT
3 – VMIB
4 – VMIB DROP
5 – SYSTEM SPEED DIAL
6 – INTERNAL PAGE
7 – EXTERNAL PAGE
8 – ALL CALL PAGE
CUSTOM CALL ROUTING : 01 z To program station number, dial the station number. (Ex. Dial
INPUT 1 : STA 100 station number '100')
CUSTOM CALL ROUTING : 01 z To program Hunt Group, dial a hunt group number. (Ex. Dial
INPUT 1 : HUNT GRP 621 Hunt group 621.)
CUSTOM CALL ROUTING : 01 z To program system announcement, dial a VMIB system

INPUT 1 : VMIB ANNC 1 announcement number.
CUSTOM CALL ROUTING : 01 z To program system drop the CO line after providing the
INPUT 1 : VMIB ANNC 10 (#) announcement, dial a VMIB system announcement number
and dial “#”.
CUSTOM CALL ROUTING : 01 z To program System Speed Dial, dial a system speed bin
INPUT 1 : SYS SPD 2000 number. (Ex. Dial Speed bin 2000.)
CUSTOM CALL ROUTING : 01 z To program Internal Page, dial an internal page number. (Ex.
INPUT 1 : INT PAGE 4 Dial 4.)
CUSTOM CALL ROUTING : 01 z To program External Page, dial an external page number. (Ex.
INPUT 1 : EXT PAGE 2 Dial 2.)
CUSTOM CALL ROUTING : 01 z To program All Call Page, dial an all call page number. (Ex.
INPUT 1 : ALL 1 Dial 1.)
136
Admin Programming
CUSTOM CALL ROUTING : 01 (4) To delete the content of entry, press the [SPEED] button.
INPUT 1 : …
CUSTOM CALL ROUTING : 01 (5) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
INPUT 1 : VMIB ANNC 1 permanently.
CUSTOM CALL ROUTING z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
SELECT CCR TABLE (01-70) then system goes to step (1) without updating system memory.
TYPE (DIGIT) TYPE RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

1 Station STA # -
2
Hunt Group HUNT # -
3 VMIB Announce # -
4 VMIB Drop Announce #
2000-4999 (LDK-300)
5 System Speed -
2000-3499 (LDK-100)
6 Internal Page 1 – 30 -
7 External Page 1–3 -
1: INT All Page
8 All Call Page 1–3 - 2: EXT All Page
3: All Page
TABLE 12.2.1 Custom Call Routing Table (PGM 228)
137
Admin Programming
12.3 EXECUTIVE / SECRETARY TABLE (PGM 229)
There are a number of Executive/Secretary pairs available for assignment so that when the executive
designated station is in DND state, intercom calls and transfers will be automatically routed to the
designated secretary station. By default, Executive/Secretary Pairs are not assigned at all. In LDK-
300(100), system supports 36(12) Executive/Secretary pairs.
PROCEDURE
EXEC/SEC PAIRS (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 229. In LDK-100, 01-12 is displayed.

ENTER BIN NO (01-36)
EXEC/SEC PAIRS (2) Select one of Exec/Sec pairs number. (Ex Pair 1: Dial 01 for bin
PAIR 1 . . . ./. . . . number 1).
EXEC/SEC PAIRS (3) To assign Exec/Sec pair, Dial Executive station number and
PAIR 01 101/105 Secretary station number sequentially, then Exec/Sec pair will
be displayed on the LCD. (Ex. Exec/Sec:101/105). To delete
Exec/Sec pair, press the [SPEED] button.
EXEC/SEC PAIRS (4) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
EXEC/SEC PAIRS z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,

Executive/Secretary Table STA # -
TABLE 12.3.1 Executive/Secretary Table (PGM 229)
138
Admin Programming
12.4 DID DIGITS CONVERSION TABLE (PGM 230)
With Direct Inward Dialing (DID), a user dials through a public telephone network. To complete the
connection, the DID trunk receives two, three or four digits from the central office, and routes the call
to the proper corresponding station. The DID dialed digits may be modified by stripping up to two
leading digits, by substitution of two leading digits (after stripping).
PROCEDURE
DID DIGIT CONVERSION (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 230. LCD shows current status of DID Digit
F1:RCV_NO F2:DGT_CONV Conversion. To program, use the Flex. Buttons of Table 12.4.1.
DID DIGIT CONVERSION (2) To assign received digit number from PBX, press Flex. BTN 1
RCV_NO : 3 (2 - 4) and enter data. Then entered data will be displayed on the LCD.
DID DGT MASK (3) To assign converted DID 4 digits, press Flex. BTN 2 and dial 4
#*** digits (combination of 0-9, *, #), then entered 4 digits will be
DID DIGIT CONVERSION (4) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
F1:RCV_NO F2:DGT_CONV permanently.
DID DIGIT CONVERSION z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
F1:RCV_NO F2:DGT_CONV then system goes to step (1) without updating system memory.

DID Received Digit No.
1 2-4 3
from PX
d : digit (0 - 9)
4 digits
2 DID Digit Conversion #*** # : ignore digits
(d, *, #)
* : any kind of digit
TABLE 12.4.1 Button Configuration for DID Digit Conversion (PGM 230)
139
Admin Programming
12.5 FLEXIBLE DID TABLE (PGM 231)
This table is for flexible DID table service.
PROCEDURE
FLEX DID CONV TABLE (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 231.

ENTER BIN NO (000 – 999) To enter flexible DID table, dial digits (000-999). (Ex. 001)
TALBE BIN 001 (2) To select each item of flexible DID table, press Flex. BTN 1-5,
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-5) then the entered data will be displayed on the LCD.
TABLE 001 NAME (3) To enter DID Name, press Flex BTN 1 and enter the name.
………...
TABLE 000 DAY DEST (4) To enter Day destination, press Flex BTN 2 and dial
NONE (1-9) destination type and destination number as follow;
1 – STA: dial type number 1 and dial station number.
2 – HUNT: dial type number 2 and dial hunt group number.
3 – VMIB: dial type number 3 and dial VMIB announcement
number.
4 – VMIB (#) (after The VMIB announcement is heard and the
CO line is dropped.) : dial type number 4 and dial VMIB
announcement number.
5 – SPD: dial type number 5 and dial Speed bin number.
6 – INT PAGE: dial type number 6 and dial Page number
7 – EXT PAGE: dial type number 7 and dial Page number
8- ALL PAGE: dial type number 8 and dial Page number
9 – NET NUM: dial type number 9 and dial the net station
number.
TABLE 001 NIGHT DEST (5) To enter Night Destination, Flex. BTN 3 and dial destination
NONE (1-9) type and destination number.
TABLE 001 WEEKEND DEST (6) To enter Weekend Destination, Flex. BTN 4 and dial
NONE (1-9) destination type and destination number.
TABLE 001 DAY DEST (7) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
STA 100 permanently.
DID CONV TABLE 001 z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-5) then system goes to step (1) without updating system
memory.
140
Admin Programming

1 – 11
1 DID Name None Max. 11 characters
Chars
STA # /
Hunt # /
VMIB # / 00 – 70 (00: Not assigned)
VMIB # drop STA # 00 – 70 (00: Not assigned)
2 Day Destination SPD Or 2000-4999 (LDK-300), 2000-3499 (LDK-100)
Int Page Null 1-30 (LDK-300), 1-10 (LDK-100)
Ext Page 1–3
All Page 1–3
Net Num Network station number.
STA # /
Hunt # /
VMIB # drop 00 – 70 (00: Not assigned)
3 Night Destination SPD ATD STA # 2000-4999 (LDK-300), 2000-3499 (LDK-100)
Int Page 1-30 (LDK-300), 1-10 (LDK-100)
Ext Page 1–3
All Page 1-3
Net Num Network station number.
STA # /
Hunt # /
Weekend
4 SPD ATD STA # 2000-4999 (LDK-300), 2000-3499 (LDK-100)
Destination
Int Page 1-30 (LDK-300), 1-10 (LDK-100)
Ext Page 1–3
All Page 1–3
Net Num Network station number
STA # /
Hunt # /
Reroute
5 VMIB # / ATD STA # 00 – 70 (00: Not assigned)
Destination
SPD 2000-4999 (LDK-300), 2000-3499 (LDK-100)
TABLE 12.5.1 Button Configuration of Flexible DID Table (PGM 231)
141
Admin Programming
12.6 SYSTEM SPEED ZONE (PGM 232)
PROCEDURE
SYSTEM SPD ZONE PGM (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 232.

ENTER ZONE NO (01-10)
SYSTEM SPD ZONE 01 (2) Enter Zone Number (01 - 10).

F1:ZN F2:STA F3:TCHK
ENTER NEW ZONE RANGE (3) To enter speed zone range, press Flex. BTN 1 and dial related
ZONE 01 : xxxx- xxxx new zone range.
ENTER STA RANGE (4) To enter the station range, press Flex. BTN 2 and dial related
ZONE 01 : xxx – xxx new station range.
(5) To toggle speed zone toll check, press Flex. BTN 3, then LED 3
shows toll check status of current zone.
SYSTEM SPD ZONE PGM (6) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
ENTER ZONE NO (01-10) permanently.
SYSTEM SPD ZONE PGM z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
ENTER ZONE NO (01-10) then system goes to step (1) without updating system memory.

2200 – 4999 (LDK-300) Each zone is exclusive
1 Speed Bin Range in Zone
2200 – 3499 (LDK-100) (2000 – 2199: Toll Free Zone)
Station Range to 100 – 399 (LDK-300)
2 STA No.
Access Zone 100 – 227 (LDK-100)
3 Toll Checking YES / NO YES (ON)
TABLE 12.6.1 Button Configuration for System Speed Dial Zone (PGM 232)
142
Admin Programming
12.7 WEEKLY TIME TABLE (PGM 233)
PROCEDURE
WEEKLY TIME TBL (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 233.

DIAL DIGIT (00-15)
WEEKLY TIME TBL (2) To program each Weekly Time Table, dial 2 digits of 00-15 (Ex.
DIAL DIGIT (00-15) 07). Table of index 00 is used for the Main Attendant Auto Ring
mode. Tables of index 01~15 are used for the ICM Tenancy
Attendants Auto Ring mode.
WEEKLY TIME TBL 07 (3) Each time table has 1-7 day mode as TABLE 12.7.1. Press one
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-7) of Flex. BTNs. (Ex. BTN 5: Friday)
WEEKLY TBL : FRI (4) Pressing Flex. BTN 3, the start time of Day, Night and Weekend
D:09:00 N: W: may be changed. Press Flex. BTN 1 to edit start time of Day
mode, and enter 4 digits continuously. (Ex. 0900 for 09:00)
WEEKLY TBL : FRI (5) Press Flex. BTN 2 to edit start time of Night mode, and enter 4
D:09:00 N:18:00 W: digits continuously. (e.g. 1800 for 18:00). Press Flex. BTN 3 for
Weekend mode time.
WEEKLY TIME TBL 07 (6) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button. Then, system goes to up level.
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-7) Press one of Flex. BTNs (1-7) for another day. Continue step
(3).
WEEKLY TIME TBL z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
DIAL DIGIT (00-15) then system goes to step (1) without updating system memory.
BTN ITEM REMARK

1 Monday Refer Table 12.7.2
2 Tuesday
3 Wednesday
4 Thursday
5 Friday
6 Saturday
7 Sunday
TABLE 12.7.1 Weekly Time Table - 1 (PGM 233)

1 Day Day ring mode start time (HH:MM)
2 Night Night ring mode start time (HH:MM)
3 Weekend Weekend ring mode start time (HH:MM)
TABLE 12.7.2 Weekly Time Table - 2 (PGM 233)
143
Admin Programming
12.8 VOICE MAIL DIALING TABLE (PGM 234)
PROCEDURE
VOICE MAIL DIALING TBL (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 234.

DIAL DIGIT (1-9)
VOICE MAIL 1 (2) To program each dialing table, dial digit as TABLE 12.8.1.
PREFIX OR SUFFIX (0-1)
VOICE MAIL 1 (3) Enter digits (0-9, *, #, Pause) within 12 characters. To enter the
PRE XXXXXXXXXXXX pause, press the [CALLBK] button.
VOICE MAIL DIALING TBL (4) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
DIAL DIGIT (1-9) permanently.
VOICE MAIL DIALING TBL z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
DIAL DIGIT (1-9) then system goes to step (1) without updating system memory.
DIGIT ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

Prefix : P#
1 VM Table 1 Put Mail
Suffix : -
Prefix : P##
2 VM Table 2 Get Mail
Suffix : -
Prefix : P#*3P
3 VM Table 3 Busy Table
Suffix : -
Prefix : P#*4P
4 VM Table 4 No Answer Table
Suffix : -
Prefix : P#*5P
5 VM Table 5 Error Table
Suffix : -
Prefix : P#*6P
6 VM Table 6 DND Table
Suffix : -
Prefix :
7 VM Table 7
Suffix : -
Prefix :
8 VM Table 8
Suffix : -
9 VM Table 9 ***** Disconnect Table
TABLE 12.8.1 Voice Mail Table (PGM 234)
144
Admin Programming
12.9 TIE ROUTING TABLE (PGM 235)
Maximum 30 Tie Line routings can be programmed. Maximum 6 CO lines are assignable to each
Routing. By default, Tie Line Routings are not assigned at all.
PROCEDURE
TIE LINE ROUTING (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 235.

DIAL ROUTING NO 01-30
TIE LINE ROUTING 01 (2) Enter two digits for routing number (01-30). (Ex. 01)
... ... ... ... ... ...
(3) To assign Tie Line Routing, press Flex. BTN 1-6 and enter CO
line number. See TABLE 12.9.1.
z To delete any of code, press Flex. BTN 1-6 and press the
[SPEED] button. See TABLE 11.9.1.
TIE LINE ROUTING (4) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
DIAL ROUTING NO 01-30 permanently.
TIE LINE ROUTING z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
DIAL ROUTING NO 01-30 then system goes to step (1) without updating system memory.

001 – 200 (LDK-300)
Tie Routing Table (1-30) -
01 – 40 (LDK-100)
TABLE 12.9.1 Tie Routing Table (PGM 235)
145
Admin Programming
13. NETWORKING ATTRIBUTE

To program NETWORKING ATTRIBUTE, press the [TRANS/PGM] button and dial 320 - 324.
13.1 Networking Basic Attribute (PGM 320)
PROCEDURE
NET BASIC ATTRIBUTE (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 320

PRESS FLEX KEY(1-5)
NET RETRY COUNT (2) To program Networking Basic Attribute, Press the Flex Btn 1-5.
(00 – 99) : 25 Related message will be displayed on LCD. (EX: Btn2)
NET RETRY COUNT (3) To change the value, dial the value in the range (EX:30)
(00 – 99) : 30
NET RETRY COUNT (4) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for saving database
NET BASIC ATTRIBUTE z Press [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button, then

1 Networking Enable ON / OFF OFF Enable Networking function
No need at direct connection between LDK
Networking
2 00 - 99 00 systems. This field is available at connection
Retry Count
through the public network.
The name of calling station is sent to the called
system between LDK systems. CNIP is displayed
Networking
3 ON / OFF ON at called party stations display based on the
CNIP Enable
programming. If the CNIP and CLI are received
together, CNIP is prior to CLI.
Networking
4 ON / OFF OFF Reserved for future usage
CONP Enable
Networking Select the information element type for Networking
5 FAC / UUS FAC
Signal Method supplementary service message.
Networking Enable Centralized attendant
6 ON/OFF OFF
CAS Enable In master system, CAS should be disabled.
Networking
7 ON/OFF OFF Reserved for future usage
VPN Enable
TABLE 13.1.1 Networking Basic Attribute (PGM 320)
146
Admin Programming
13.2 Networking Supplementary Attribute (PGM 321)
PROCEDURE
NET SUPPLIMENTARY ATTR (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 321

PRESS FLEX KEY(1-1)
NET TRANSFER MODE (2) To program Networking Supplementary Attribute, Press the
(1:RERT/ 0:JOIN): JOIN Flex Btn 1-1. Related message will be displayed on LCD.
NET TRANSFER MODE (3) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for saving database
(1:RERT/ 0:JOIN): RERT permanently.
NET SUPPLIMENTARY ATTR z Press [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button, then

Networking
1 RERT/JOIN REROUT Only Transfer by Rerouting is possible
Transfer Mode
2 TCP port 4 digits 9000 TCP port for BLF message
3 UDP port 4 digits 9001 UDP port for BLF message
BLF Manager IP
4 12 digits 0.0.0.0 IP Address of BLF manager for BLF service
Address
5 Duration of BLF status 01 ~ 20 sec 02 Duration of BLF status message
6 Multicast IP Address 12 digits 0.0.0.0 IP address of Multicast for BLF service
Net Trans Fault Recall
7 1 ~ 300 10 Network transfer fault recall timer.
Timer
TABLE 13.2.1 Networking Supplementary Attribute (PGM 321)
147
Admin Programming
13.3 Networking CO Line Attribute (PGM 322)
PROCEDURE
NET COLINE ATTRIBUTE (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 322

ENTER COL RANGE
001-002 NET COL PGM (2) Enter CO line range.

To program, press the Flex. BTN. Press BTN 1-3 and enter related
data, then entered data will be displayed on the LCD.
001-002 NET CO GRP (3) Press Flex. BTN 1 and assign Networking CO Group.
(00 – 24) : 00
001-002 NET CO GRP (4) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for saving database
001-002 NET COL PGM z Press [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button, then
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-3) system goes to step (2) without updating system memory.

Networking CO group programming for Networking
1 Networking CO Group 00 - 24 00
call between LDK systems.
Networking Set about the sharing CO line at slave system.
2 ON / OFF OFF
CO OutSend
Networking Set about the PSTN CO line at master system.
3 ON / OFF OFF
CO OutTrans
TABLE 13.3.1 Networking CO Line Attribute (PGM 322)
148
Admin Programming
13.4 Networking Attendant Assignment (PGM 323)
PROCEDURE
CAS / VPN CO GROUP ASG (1). [TRANS/PGM] + 323

CAS NUM TBL INDEX (2). To assign CO group for Centralized Attendant, press the Flex BTN 1.
(00-71) : 00 Enter the table index number of CO group which is connected with
CAS system. (Refer to PGM 324.)
VPN CO GROUP (3). Press the Flex. BTN 2. And the procedure is the same as CAS CO
(00-24) : 00 group assignment.
VPN CO GROUP ● Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database permanently.
(00-24) : 05
CAS / VPN CO GROUP ASG ● Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button, then
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-3) system goes to step (1) without updating system memory

1 CAS Num table index 00 - 71 00 Networking Net bin number for CAS.
2 VPN CO Group 00 – 24 00 Reserved for future usage
3 Prefix for CAS 8 digits - Prefix for CAS Call
TABLE 13.4.1 Centralized Attendant & VPN CO Group Assignment (PGM 323)
149
Admin Programming
13.5 Networking Routing Table (PGM 324)
PROCEDURE
NET NUM PLAN TABLE (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 324.

ENTER BIN NO (00 – 71)
00 NET NUM PLAN TBL (2) To assign Networking Numbering Plan Table, Dial the Table
PRESS FLEX KEY (1 – 6) number user want to program.
To program, press the Flex. BTN. Press BTN 1-6 and enter related
data, then entered data will be displayed on the LCD.
00 NUM PLAN CODE (3) Press Flex Btn 1 and dial the networking numbering plan
................ code.
00 NUM PLAN CO GRP (4) Press Flex Btn 2 and dial the networking CO group number.
(00-24) : . .
00 SYSTEM USAGE (5) Press Flex Btn 3 and dial the type of networking CO group.
(1:VOIP/0:QSIG): QSIG
00 CPN INFORMATION (6) In case of VOIP, press Flex Btn 4 and dial the CPN
................ information.
00 NET NUM PLAN TBL z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
PRESS FLEX KEY (1 – 6) then system goes to step (1) without updating system memory

‘*’ means any digits can be inserted between 0 ~ 9.
1 Net Numbering Code 16 digits -- The digits followed by ‘#’ is a internal station
number.
2 Net Number CO Group 00 – 24 -- ‘00’ means an internal net station number.
3 System Usage VOIP / QSIG QSIG Select Routing Table Usage
4 CPN or IP Information 16 digits -- CPN for ISDN, IP address for VoIP
2000 – 4999
(LDK-300) Alternative Dial Number(System SPD Bin) when
5 Alternate Dial Bin 2000 – 3499 -
the networking path has a fatal problem.
(LDK-100)
IP Address of destination system to support DECT
6 Destination MPB IP IP Address --
mobility service.
TABLE 13.5.1 Networking Routing Table (PGM 324)
150
Admin Programming
14. VOIB ATTRIBUTE

14.1 VOIP IP SETTING (PGM 340)
PROCEDURE
VOIP IP SETTING (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 340.

F1:BRD1 F2:BRD2 F3:BRD3
To program the first VOIB, Press Flex Btn 1
VOIB 1 NET SETTING (2) To program IP Address of VOIB 1, Press Flex Btn 1
IP ADDR(SKIP:#) z To skip entering digit, press #.

165.147. 3. 1
IP ADDR(SKIP:#) (3) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for saving database

165.147. 3. 1 permanently.
VOIB 1 NET SETTING z Press [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button, then
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-10) system goes to step (1) without updating system memory.
BTN ITEM INTERCOM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

1 IP Address(SKIP:#) 12 Digits 0.0.0.0.
2 GATEWAY Address (SKIP:#) 12 Digits 0.0.0.0.
3 SUBNET Mask(SKIP:#) 12 Digits 0.0.0.0.
4 DNS Address (SKIP:#) 12 Digits 0.0.0.0.
5 TRACE Password 10 Digits ....
6 Default Codec 0–3 0
7 Default Gain 1 – 62 31
8 No Delay (TOS) ON / OFF OFF
9 Throughput (TOS) HIGH / NORMAL NORMAL
10 Reliability (TOS) HIGH / NORMAL NORMAL
TABLE 14.1.1 VOIB IP SETTING (PGM 340)
151
Admin Programming
15. NATION SPECIFIC PROGRAMMING

If system parameters are to be changed, press the [TRANS/PGM] button and dial 400-423. When
programming, LCD and LEDs indicate current programmed data and programming status. The
as LCD/LEDs show their status) are stored into permanent system memory.
15.1 DTIB RX GAIN CONTROL (PGM 400)
PROCEDURE
DTIB RX GAIN (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 400.

DTIB RX GAIN (2) Press one of Flex. BTNs (1~13) to select a device type to
DTIB/DTIB: 26 (00-63) change the gain. (Ex. Press Flex. BTN 1.) The LCD shows RX
gain of the device from other devices.
DTIB RX GAIN (3) For example, press the Flex. BTN 2 to change the Rx gain of
DTIB/SLIB: 33 (00-63) DTIB from SLIB.
DTIB RX GAIN (4) To change the gain dial new gain (00-63) and LCD shows the
DTIB/SLIB: 45 (00-63) changed value. (Ex. dial 45.)
DTIB RX GAIN (5) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
DTIB RX GAIN z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
152
Admin Programming
15.2 SLIB RX GAIN CONTROL (PGM 401)
PROCEDURE
SLIB RX GAIN (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 401.

SLIB RX GAIN (2) Press one of Flex. BTNs (01~13) to select a device type to
SLIB/DTIB: 12 (00-63) change the gain. (Ex. Press Flex. BTN 1.) The LCD shows RX
SLIB RX GAIN (3) For example, press the Flex. BTN 2 to change the Rx gain of
SLIB/SLIB: 26 (00-63) SLIB from the other SLIB.
SLIB RX GAIN (4) To change the gain dial new gain (00-63) and LCD shows the
SLIB/SLIB: 45 (00-63) changed value. (Ex. dial 45.)
SLIB RX GAIN (5) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
SLIB RX GAIN z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
PRESS FLEX KEY (01-13) then system goes to step (1) without updating system memory..
15.3 CTR SLIB RX GAIN CONTROL (PGM 402)
PROCEDURE
SLIB12 RX GAIN (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 402.

SLIB12 RX GAIN (2) Press one of Flex. BTNs (01~13) to select a device type to
SLIB12/DTIB: 12 (00-63) change the gain. (Ex. Press Flex. BTN 1.) The LCD shows RX
SLIB12 RX GAIN (3) For example, press the Flex. BTN 2 to change the Rx gain of
SLIB12/SLIB: 26 (00-63) SLIB12 from SLIB.
SLIB12 RX GAIN (4) To change the gain dial new gain (00-63) and LCD shows the
SLIB12/SLIB: 45 (00-63) changed value. (Ex. dial 45.)
SLIB12 RX GAIN (5) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
SLIB12 RX GAIN z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
153
Admin Programming
15.4 WTIB RX GAIN CONTROL (PGM 403)
PROCEDURE
WTIB RX GAIN (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 403.

WTIB RX GAIN (2) Press one of Flex. BTNs (01~13) to select a device type to
WTIB/DTIB: 26 (00-63) change the gain. (Ex. Press Flex. BTN 1.) The LCD shows RX
WTIB RX GAIN (3) For example, press the Flex. BTN 2 to change the Rx gain of
WTIB/SLIB: 33 (00-63) WTIB from SLIB.
WTIB RX GAIN (4) To change the gain dial new gain (00-63) and LCD shows the
WTIB/SLIB: 45 (00-63) changed value. (Ex. dial 45.)
WTIB RX GAIN (5) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
WTIB RX GAIN z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
15.5 ACOB RX GAIN CONTROL (PGM 404)
PROCEDURE
ACOB RX GAIN (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 404.

ACOB RX GAIN (2) Press one of Flex. BTNs (01~14) to select a device type to
ACOB/DTIB: 26 (00-63) change the gain. (Ex. Press Flex. BTN 1.) The LCD shows RX
ACOB RX GAIN (3) For example, press the Flex. BTN 2 to change the Rx gain of
ACOB/SLIB: 37 (00-63) ACOB from SLIB.
ACOB RX GAIN (4) To change the gain dial new gain (00-63) and LCD shows the
ACOB/SLIB: 45 (00-63) changed value. (Ex. dial 45.)
ACOB RX GAIN (5) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
ACOB RX GAIN z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
154
Admin Programming
15.6 CTR ACOB RX GAIN CONTROL (PGM 405)
PROCEDURE
ACOB8 RX GAIN (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 405.

ACOB8 RX GAIN (2) Press one of Flex. BTNs (01~14) to select a device type to
ACOB8/DTIB: 26 (00-63) change the gain. (Ex. Press Flex. BTN 1.) The LCD shows RX
ACOB8 RX GAIN (3) For example, press the Flex. BTN 2 to change the Rx gain of
ACOB8/SLIB: 37 (00-63) LCOB8 from SLIB.
ACOB8 RX GAIN (4) To change the gain dial new gain (00-63) and LCD shows the
ACOB8/SLIB: 45 (00-63) changed value. (Ex. dial 45.)
ACOB8 RX GAIN (5) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
ACOB8 RX GAIN z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
15.7 DCOB RX GAIN CONTROL (PGM 406)
PROCEDURE
DCOB8 RX GAIN (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 406.

DCOB8 RX GAIN (2) Press one of Flex. BTNs (01~14) to select a device type to
DCOB8/DTIB: 26 (00-63) change the gain. (Ex. Press Flex. BTN 1.) The LCD shows RX
DCOB8 RX GAIN (3) For example, press the Flex. BTN 2 to change the Rx gain of
DCOB8/SLIB: 37 (00-63) DCOB from SLIB.
DCOB8 RX GAIN (4) To change the gain dial new gain (00-63) and LCD shows the
DCOB8/SLIB: 45 (00-63) changed value. (Ex. dial 45.)
DCOB8 RX GAIN (5) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
DCOB8 RX GAIN z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
155
Admin Programming
15.8 VMIB RX GAIN CONTROL (PGM 407)
PROCEDURE
VMIB RX GAIN (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 407.

VMIB RX GAIN (2) Press one of Flex. BTNs (1~9) to select a device type to change
VMIB/DTIB: 21 (00-63) the gain. (Ex. Press Flex. BTN 1.) The LCD shows RX gain of
the device from other devices.
VMIB RX GAIN (3) For example, press the Flex. BTN 2 to change the Rx gain of
VMIB/SLIB: 32 (00-63) VMIB from SLIB.
VMIB RX GAIN (4) To change the gain, dial new gain (00-63) and LCD shows the
VMIB/SLIB: 45 (00-63) changed value. (Ex. dial 45.)
VMIB RX GAIN (5) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
VMIB RX GAIN z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
15.9 DTMF RCVR RX GAIN CONTROL (PGM 408)
PROCEDURE
DTMF RCVR RX GAIN (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 408.

DTMF RCVR RX GAIN (2) Press one of Flex. BTNs (1~5) to select a device type to change
DTMF RC/SLIB: 37 (00-63) the gain. (Ex. Press Flex. BTN 1.) The LCD shows RX gain of
DTMF RCVR RX GAIN (3) For example, press the Flex. BTN 3 to change the Rx gain of
DTMF RC/ACOB: 24 (00-63) DTMF Receiver from ACOB.
DTMF RCVR RX GAIN (4) To change the gain dial new gain (00-63) and LCD shows the
DRMF RC/ACOB: 45 (00-63) changed value. (Ex. dial 45.)
DTMF RCVR RX GAIN (5) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
DTMF RCVR RX GAIN z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
156
Admin Programming
15.10 EXT PAGE RX GAIN CONTROL (PGM 409)
PROCEDURE
EXT PAGE RX GAIN (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 409.

EXT PAGE RX GAIN (2) Press one of Flex. BTNs (1~11) to select a device type to
EXT PAG /DTIB: 26 (00-63) change the gain. (Ex. Press Flex. BTN 1.) The LCD shows RX
EXT PAGE RX GAIN (3) For example, press the Flex. BTN 2 to change the Rx gain of
EXT PAG /SLIB: 37 (00-63) External Page from SLIB.
EXT PAGE RX GAIN (4) To change the gain dial new gain (00-63) and LCD shows the
EXT PAG /SLIB: 45 (00-63) changed value. (Ex. dial 45.)
EXT PAGE RX GAIN (5) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
EXT PAGE RX GAIN z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
15.11 CPT RX GAIN CONTROL (PGM 410)
PROCEDURE
CPT RX GAIN (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 410.

CPT RX GAIN (2) Press one of Flex. BTNs (1~3) to select a device type to change
CPT/ACOB: 24 (00-63) the gain. (Ex. Press Flex. BTN 1.) The LCD shows RX gain of
CPT RX GAIN (3) For example, press the Flex. BTN 3 to change the Rx gain of
CPT/DCOB: 24 (00-63) CPT from DCOB.
CPT RX GAIN (4) To change the gain dial new gain (00-63) and LCD shows the
CPT/DCOB: 45 (00-63) changed value. (Ex. dial 45.)
CPT RX GAIN (5) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
CPT RX GAIN z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
157
Admin Programming
15.12 MODEM RX GAIN CONTROL (PGM 411)
PROCEDURE
MODEM RX GAIN (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 411.

MODEM RX GAIN (2) Press one of Flex. BTNs (1~3) to select a device type to change
MODEM /ACOB: 24 (00-63) the gain. (Ex. Press Flex. BTN 1.) The LCD shows RX gain of
MODEM RX GAIN (3) For example, press the Flex. BTN 3 to change the Rx gain of
MODEM /DCOB: 24 (00-63) Modem from DCOB.
MODEM RX GAIN (4) To change the gain dial new gain (00-63) and LCD shows the
MODEM /DCOB: 45 (00-63) changed value. (Ex. dial 45.)
MODEM RX GAIN (5) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
MODEM RX GAIN z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
158
Admin Programming
15.13 SHORT SLIB GAIN CONTROL (PGM 412) ( SAF only )
PROCEDURE
SHORT SLIB GAIN (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 412.

SHORT SLIB GAIN (2) Press one of Flex. BTNs (1~5) to select a device type to
S_SLIB/S_ACO: 32 (00-63) change the gain. (Ex. Press Flex. BTN 1.) The LCD shows
Short SLIB gain of the device from other devices.
SHORT SLIB GAIN (3) To change the gain, dial new gain (00-63) and LCD shows the
S_SLIB/S_ACO: 45 (00-63) changed value. (Ex. dial 45.)
SHORT SLIB GAIN (4) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
SHORT SLIB GAIN z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,

1 SHORT ACO 00 – 63 31
2 LONG ACO 00 – 63 31
TABLE 15.13.1 Button Configuration for Short SLIB Gain (PGM 412)
159
Admin Programming
15.14 LONG SLIB GAIN CONTROL (PGM 413) ( SAF only )
PROCEDURE
LONG SLIB GAIN (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 413.

LONG SLIB GAIN (2) Press one of Flex. BTNs (1~5) to select a device type to
L_SLIB/S_ACO: 32 (00-63) change the gain. (Ex. Press Flex. BTN 1.) The LCD shows Long
SLIB gain of the device from other devices.
SHORT SLIB GAIN (3) To change the gain, dial new gain (00-63) and LCD shows the
L_SLIB/S_ACO: 45 (00-63) changed value. (Ex. dial 45.)
LONG SLIB GAIN (4) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
LONG SLIB GAIN z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
15.15 FAR SLIB GAIN CONTROL (PGM 414) ( SAF only )
PROCEDURE
FAR SLIB GAIN (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 414.

FAR SLIB GAIN (2) Press one of Flex. BTNs (1~5) to select a device type to
F_SLIB/S_ACO: 32 (00-63) change the gain. (Ex. Press Flex. BTN 1.) The LCD shows Far
SLIB gain of the device from other devices.
FAR SLIB GAIN (3) To change the gain, dial new gain (00-63) and LCD shows the
F_SLIB/S_ACO: 45 (00-63) changed value. (Ex. dial 45.)
FAR SLIB GAIN (4) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
FAR SLIB GAIN z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
160
Admin Programming
15.16 SHORT ACO GAIN CONTROL (PGM 415) ( SAF only )
PROCEDURE
SHORT ACO GAIN (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 415.

SHORT ACO GAIN (2) Press one of Flex. BTNs (1~5) to select a device type to
S_ACO/S_SLIB: 32 (00-63) change the gain. (Ex. Press Flex. BTN 1.) The LCD shows
Short ACO gain of the device from other devices.
SHORT ACO GAIN (3) To change the gain, dial new gain (00-63) and LCD shows the
S_ACO/S_SLIB: 45 (00-63) changed value. (Ex. dial 45.)
SHORT ACO GAIN (4) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
SHORT ACO GAIN z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,

1 SHORT SLIB 00 – 63 35
2 LONG SLIB 00 – 63 41
3 FAR SLIB 00 – 63 41
TABLE 15.13.1 Button Configuration for Short SLIB Gain (PGM 412)
161
Admin Programming
15.17 LONG ACO GAIN CONTROL (PGM 416) ( SAF only )
PROCEDURE
LONG ACO GAIN (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 416.

LONG ACO GAIN (2) Press one of Flex. BTNs (1~5) to select a device type to
L_ACO/S_SLIB: 32 (00-63) change the gain. (Ex. Press Flex. BTN 1.) The LCD shows Long
ACO gain of the device from other devices.
LONG ACO GAIN (3) To change the gain, dial new gain (00-63) and LCD shows the
L_ACO/S_SLIB: 45 (00-63) changed value. (Ex. dial 45.)
LONG ACO GAIN (4) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
LONG ACO GAIN z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
162
Admin Programming
15.18 SYSTEM TONE FREQUENCY (PGM 420)
Frequency, user entered (dial tone, ringback tone, error tone, busy tone, dummy dial tone), may be
changed to the closest system frequency that provides.
PROCEDURE
SYS-TONE FREQUENCY (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 420.

DIAL (1-5)
DIAL TONE FREQUENCY (2) To change system tone frequency, dial 1-5 and press Flex.
T1:0425 T2:0000 BTN 1 (T1) or BTN 2 (T2) and dial 4 digits to enter new
frequency.
SYS-TONE FREQUENCY (3) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
DIAL (1-5) permanently.
SYS-TONE FREQUENCY z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,
DIAL (1-5) then system goes to step (1) without updating system memory.
BTN ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REAMRK

0000 - 9999 T1: -
1 Dial Tone Nation specific
T2: -
0000 - 9999 T1: -
2 RingBack Tone Nation specific
T2: -
0000 – 9999 T1: -
3 Busy Tone Nation specific
T2: -
0000 – 9999 T1: -
4 Error Tone Nation specific
T2: -
0000-9999 T1: -
5 Dummy Dial Tone Nation specific
T2: -
TABLE 15.18.1 Button Configuration for System Tone Frequency (PGM 420)
163
Admin Programming
15.19 DIFFERENTIAL RING FREQUENCY (PGM 421)
Frequency for 4 differential rings may be changed to the closet ring frequency that provides. Station
can change its own ring type signal by PGM 111-BTN 9.
PROCEDURE
DIFF RING FREQUENCY (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 421.

DIAL (1-4)
DIFF RING FREQ(RNG 1) (2) To change ring frequency of calling party, dial 1-4 and press
T1:1000 T2:1020 Flex. BTN 1 (T1) or BTN 2 (T2) and dial 4 digits to enter new
frequency.
DIFF RING FREQUENCY (3) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
DIFF RING FREQUENCY z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,

T1: -
1 Ring 1 0000 - 9999 Nation specific
T2: -
T1: -
T2: -
T1: -
3 Ring 3 0000 – 9999 Nation specific
T2: -
T1: -
T2: -
TABLE 15.19.1 Button Configuration for Differential Ring Frequency (PGM 421)
164
Admin Programming
15.20 DISTINCT RING FREQUENCY (PGM 422)
Frequency for 4 distinct rings may be changed to the closet ring frequency that provides. The CO line
can give its own ring type signal to the station in the system. It is assigned at PGM 142-BTN 5.
PROCEDURE
DISTINCT RING FREQUENCY (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 422.

DIAL (1-4)
DIST RING FREQ(RNG 1) (2) To change distinct CO ring frequency of called party, dial 1-4
T1:0480 T2:0000 and press BTN 1 (T1) or BTN 2 (T2) and dial 4 digits to enter
new frequency.
DIST RING FREQUENCY (3) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
DIST RING FREQUENCY z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,

T1: -
T2: -
T1: -
T2: -
T1: -
T2: -
T1: -
T2: -
TABLE 15.20.1 Button Configuration for Distinct Ring Frequency (PGM 422)
165
Admin Programming
15.21 ACNR TONE CADENCE (PGM 423)
Ring back tone, busy tone, error tone, or secondary dial tone may be programmed for ACNR.
PROCEDURE
ACNR TONE CADENCE (20MS) (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 423.

DIAL (1-4)
RBACK TONE CADENCE (2) To change ACNR tone cadence, dial 1-4 and press BTN 1 (T1)
ON:050 OFF:100 (20MS) or BTN 2 (T2) and dial 4 digits to enter new cadence.
ACNR TONE CADENCE (20MS) (3) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for updating database
ACNR TONE CADENCE (20MS) z Press the [CONF] button instead of the [HOLD/SAVE] button,

1 Ring-Back Tone 000 - 255 ON: 050 / OFF: 100 20msec base
2 Busy Tone 000 - 255 ON: 025 / OFF: 025 20msec base
3 Error Tone 000 - 255 ON: 012 / OFF: 012 20msec base
4 S-Dial Tone 000 - 255 ON: 070 / OFF: 000 20msec base
TABLE 15.21.1 Button Configuration for ACNR Cadence (PGM 423)
166
Admin Programming
16. INITIALIZATION (PGM 450)

The system has been pre-programmed with certain features which are called default data. These
features are loaded into memory when the system is initialized. The system should be always
initialized when installed or at any time the database has been corrupted. To initialize the system to
the default values, proceed as follows;
PROCEDURE
INITIALIZATION (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 450.

INITIALIZATION (2) Press one of Flex. BTNs (1-15) as described below table (Ex.
FLEX NUM PLAN Flex. BTN 1).
INITIALIZATION (3) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button, then database is initialized

FLEX NUM PLAN with default data. Confirmation tone is heard.
BTN ITEM REMARK

1 Flexible Numbering Plan Initialization PGM105, PGM106, PGM107
PGM110, PGM111, PGM112, PGM113, PGM114,
2 Station Database Initialization PGM 116, PGM117, PGM118, PGM119, PGM121,
PGM122, PGM123, PGM124, PGM179
3 CO Line Database Initialization PGM140, PGM141, PGM142, PGM143, PGM144
4 System Feature Database Initialization PGM160 – PGM 177, PGM108
5 Station Group Database Initialization PGM190, PGM191
6 ISDN Tables Database Initialization PGM201, PGM202, PGM230, PGM231
7 Reserved None(Reserved)
8 System Timer Database Initialization PGM180 – PGM182
9 Toll Table Database Initialization PGM224, PGM225
10 LCR Database Initialization PGM220 – PGM222
PGM227 – PGM229,
11 Tables Initialization
PGM232 – PGM235
12 Flexible Button Program Initialization PGM115
13 Networking Database Initialization PGM 320, PGM321,PGM322,PGM323, PGM 324
14 All Database Initialization Above All
15 System Reset By Software
TABLE 16.1 Initialization (PGM 450)
167
Admin Programming
17. PRINT PROT DATABASE (PGM 451)

In order to obtain a hard copy printout of the database, a printer should be connected to the RS-232C
connector.
PROCEDURE
PROT DATA PRINT (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 451.

PROT DATA PRINT (2) To print database, press one of Flex. BTNs 01-15 and if there
STATION DATA are entered data for selecting printed part, then selected
database name will be displayed on the LCD.
PROT DATA PRINT (3) To print out the selected database at step (2), press the
STATION DATA [HOLD/SAVE] button. (Ex. Station Database). After printing
database, confirmation tone is heard.

1 Flexible Numbering Plan Print
2 Station Database Print STN_R
3 CO Line Database Print CO_R
4 System Feature Database Print
5 Station Group Database Print
6 ISDN Tables Database Print
7 System Timer Database Print
8 Toll Table Database Print
9 LCR Database Print
10 Other Tables Print
11 Nation Specific Database Print
12 Flexible Button Program Print STN_R
13 All Database Print
14 LCD Message Print
00:ENG 01:ITA 02:FIN
03:DUT 04:SWE 05:DAN
Nation
1 Language 00 – 12 06:NOR 07:HUN 08:GER
specific
09:FRE 10:POR 11:SPA
12:KOR
2 Station Type 0–2 0 0: NORMAL 1:LG-GAP 2:LARGE
15 Quit Print
TABLE 17.1 Database Print (PGM 451)
168
Admin Programming
(Printing Example applying to LDK-300)
Flexible Numbering Plan STN Flex Numbering
PGM 106 Flexible Numbering Plan A

STA GRP PILOT NUMBER : 620-667
INT PAGE ZONES : 501-535
INT ALL CALL : 543
MEET ME PAGE : 544
EXT PAGE ZONE : 545
EXT PAGE ZONE : 546
EXT PAGE ZONE : 547
EXT ALL : 548
ALL CALL PAGE : 549
SMDR ACT CODE ENTER : 550
FLASH CMD TO CO : 551
SLT LAST SPD DIAL : 552
DND : 553
CALL FWD : 554
SPD DIAL PGM : 555
MSG WAIT ENABLE : 556
MSG WAIT RETURN : 557
SPD DIAL ACCESS : 558
DND/FWD CANCEL : 559
SLT_HOLD : 560
STA RELOC BACKUP : 561
STA RELOC RETRIEVE : 562
SLT PGM MODE ENTER : 563
ACD REROUTE : 564
PGM 107 Flexible Numbering Plan B

ALARM RESET : 565
GROUP CALL PKUP : 566
UCD DND : 568
NIGHT ANSWER : 569
CALL PARK LOCATIONS : 601-619
DIRECT CALL PKUP :7
ACCESS CO GROUP FEAT : 801-872
ACCESS IND CO FEAT : 88
TIE ROUTING ACCESS : 8901
ACCESS HELD CO FEAT : 8*
ACCESS HELD IND CO FEAT : 8#
ACCESS CO IN 1ST CO GRP :9
ATTENDANT CALL :0
DOOR OPEN 1 : #*1
DOOR OPEN 2 : #*2
DOOR OPEN 3 : #*3
DOOR OPEN 4 : #*4
DOOR OPEN 5 : #*5
DOOR OPEN 6 : #*6
DOOR OPEN 7 : #*7
VM MSG WAIT ENABLE : *8
VM MSG WAIT CANCEL : *9
169
Admin Programming
Station Attributes Station Attributes

------------------
Station 100 Attribute

======================
Station ID : KEYSET
STATION ATTR1 (PGM111)

AUTO SPKR :ON CALL FWD :OFF DND :OFF
DATA SEC :OFF HOWLING :ON I-BOX SGNL:ON
NO TCH ANS:ON PAGE ACC :OFF RING TYPE :0
SPK RING :HEAD SPK PHONE :ON VMIB SLOT :0
ICM GROUP :1 ERR TONE TAD:ON FLASH DROP:OFF

CO WARN :OFF AUTO HOLD :OFF TIME REST :OFF
CO ACCESS :ENABLE CO QUEUE :ENABLE CO PGM :DISABLE
PLA :ENABLE PREPAID :OFF SPD ACC :ENABLE
TWOWAY RED:OFF FAX MODE :OFF OFFNET MOD:ALL
UCD GRP SVC :OFF RING GRP SVC:OFF

ADMIN :ENABLE VMIB ACC :DISABLE GRP LISTN :DISABLE
OVERRIDE :DISABLE SMDR HDN :DISABLE VOICE OVR :DISABLE
WARM LINE :WARM ALARM MISB:OFF ALARM RAU1:OFF
ALARM RAU2:OFF

CLIP DISP :ON COLP DISP :OFF CLI/REDIRT:CLI
CLI M-WAIT:OFF EXT OR ATD:EXT KEYPAD FAC:DTMF
LONG/SHORT:SHORT SUB ADDR :NOT_USED AUTO TEI :FIXED
CLI NAME D:OFF CLI OUT NUM:100 PROG IND :OFF
ISDN CLIR D:OFF ISDN COLR D:OFF DID REST : OFF
STATION COS (PGM116)

DAY COS : 1 NIGHT COS : 1
:
(Printed like above for another station to range end station.)
Flex Buttons Assignment Flex Button Assignment
Station 101 Flex Button
========================
BTN 1 BTN 2 BTN 3 BTN 4 BTN 5 BTN 6 BTN 7 BTN 8
CO 1 CO 2 CO 3 CO 4 CO 5 CO 6 CO 7 LOOP

EMPTY EMPTY EMPTY EMPTY EMPTY EMPTY EMPTY EMPTY




:
( Printed like above for all keysets )
170
Admin Programming
CO Line Attributes CO Line Attribute
CO Line Ring Assignment

=================================
CO 001 Ring Assignment
DAY : STA101(0)
NIGHT: STA101(0)
ON-D : STA101(0)
WEEK : STA101(0)
Coline 1 Attribute
======================
Coline Attr1 (PGM141)
CO GRP :1 CO COS :1 DISA ACCT :OFF
CO ASGN TYPE :LOOP COLINE TYPE :CO OUT SGNL TYPE :DTMF
FLASH TYPE :LOOP UNA :OFF CO GRP ACCT :OFF

NAME DISPLAY :OFF CO NAME :
SMDR METER :NONE LINE DROP(CPN):OFF DIST RING TYPE:0
MOH TYPE :INT MUSIC
DIAL TONE :ON RING_BACK TONE:OFF
ERROR TONE :OFF BUSY TONE :OFF ANNC TONE :OFF
CO FLASH TMR :5 OPEN LOOP TMR :0

COLP TBL INDEX :NOT_ASG CLIP TBL INDEX:NOT_ASG
CALL TYPE :NATIONAL DID CONV TYPE :0 DID RM NO :0
ENBLOCK SEND :OFF
( Printed like above for another CO line )
171
Admin Programming
System Database PGM 100: Location Information

Nation Code: 82 (KOREA)
Site Name:
Area Code:
Station Prefix Code: ....
PGM 101: Slot Information
Slot# Board ID DEVS
----- ------------------------- ----------------
1 DTIB12 12 STA devices
2 UNKNOWN 0 devices
3 UNKNOWN 0 devices
4 UNKNOWN 0 devices
5 UNKNOWN 0 devices
6 PRIB 30 COL devices
7 STIB 4 STA devices, 4 COL devices
8 UNKNOWN 0 devices
9 UNKNOWN 0 devices
10 UNKNOWN 0 devices
PGM 160 : System Attributes
ATD CALL QUE RB TONE : OFF CAMP MOH/RBT : MOH

CO LINE CHOICE : LAST
DISA RETRY CNT :3 ICM CONT DIAL TONE : CONT
CO DIAL TONE DET : OFF
EXT NIGHT RING : OFF HOLD PREFERENCE : SYS
MULTI LINE CONF : ON
PRT LCR CONV DGT : OFF CONF WARN TONE : ON
PGM 161 : System Attributes
NETWORK TIME/DATE SET : OFF OFF_HOOK RING SIG : MUTE

OVRIDE 1ST CO GRP : OFF
PAGE WARN TONE : ON AUTO PRIVACY : ON
PRIVACY WARN TONE : ON
SINGLE RING FOR CO : NO WTU AUTO RLS : OFF
ACD PRN ENABLE : OFF
ACD PRINT TMR : ON ACD CLR AFTER PRN : OFF
ACD PRINT TMR UNIT : SEC
172
Admin Programming
System Database Other System Attributes

ALARM ENABLE : OFF ALARM CONTACT : CLOSE
ALARM MODE : ALARM ALARM SIGNAL MODE : ON
CO2CO DAY COS :1 CO2CO NIGHT COS :1
BUSY DESTINATION : TONE

ERROR DESTINATION : TONE
NO ANS DESTINATION : TONE
DIAL PULSE BRK RATIO : 66/33
EXT CNT(1):...
EXT CNT(2):...
EXT CNT(3):...
EXT CNT(4):...
EXT CNT(5):...
EXT CNT(6):...
EXT CNT(7):...
RS232_PORT_1 BAUDRATE : 19200 RS232_PORT_1 CTS_RTS : OFF

RS232_PORT_1 PAGE_BEAK : OFF RS232_PORT_1 LINE PAGE : 60
LCD TIME MODE : 12H LCD DATE MODE :

DDMMYY
SMDR Attributes
SMDR SAVE : OFF SMDR PRINT : OFF
RECORD TYPE : LD
LD CALL DGT CNT :7 PRINT INCOMING CALL : OFF
PRINT LOST CALL : OFF
RECORD IN DETAIL : ON HIDDEN DIALED DGT : 0
SMDR CURRENCY UNIT :

COST PER PULSE :0 SMDR FRACTION : 0
SMDR START TIMER(1sec): 0
SMDR HIDE DGT : RIGHT
SMDR LD CODE: 0
ISDN System Attributes

ADVICE OF CHARGE : NO SERVICE
CO ATD CODE : ....
IN PREFIX CODE INSERT : OFF
OUT PREFIX CODE INSERT : ON
A_U_LAW LINE INSTALLED : A_LAW
CLI PRINT : OFF
INTERNATIONAL ACCS CODE:
CALLING SUB_ADDRESS : OFF
173
Admin Programming
ISDN Tables COLP Table Entry

================================================
COLP TABLE 00 : 12345
------------------------
COLP TABLE 01 : 4536799
------------------------
COLP TABLE 02 :
------------------------
COLP TABLE 03 :
------------------------
COLP TABLE 04 :
------------------------
COLP TABLE 05 :
------------------------
COLP TABLE 06 :
:
MSN Table Entry

================================================
MSN TABLE 0
------------------------
COL_NO : 001. FLEX_DID_NO : .230
SUB_NO : 9 MSN_TEL_NO : 26303621
MSN TABLE 1
------------------------
COL_NO : ... FLEX_DID_NO : ...
SUB_NO : . MSN_TEL_NO :
MSN TABLE 2
------------------------
MSN TABLE 3
------------------------
MSN TABLE 4
------------------------
:
Flexible Did Conv Table Entry

================================================
DID CONV TABLE 0

------------------------
COL NAME :
DAY DESTINATION : STA230
NIGHT DESTINATION : VMIB(#) 50
WEEKEND DESTINATION :SPD 2500
DID CONV TABLE 1

------------------------
COL NAME :
DAY DESTINATION : ....
NIGHT DESTINATION : ....
WEEKEND DESTINATION : ....
DID CONV TABLE 2

------------------------
COL NAME :
DAY DESTINATION : ....
NIGHT DESTINATION : ....
WEEKEND DESTINATION : ....
:
174
Admin Programming
System Timers System Timer Assignment

=======================
System Timer 1
ATD RCL TIMER(min) :1 CALL PARK TIMER(sec) :120

CAMPON TRNS RCL TIMER(sec) :30 EXCL HOLD RCL TIMER(sec) :60
I-HOLD RCL TIMER(sec) :30 SYS HOLD RCL TIMER(sec) :30
TRANSFER RCL TIMER(sec) :30 ACNR DELAY TIMER(sec) :30
ACNR NO ANS TIMER(sec) :30 ACNR PAUSE TIMER(sec) :30
ACNR RETRY CNT :3 ACNR NO TONE RTY CNT :1
ACNR TONE DCT TIMER(sec) :30 CO AUTO RLS TIMER(sec) :30
CCR INT DGT TIMER(100ms) :30 CALL DROP WARN TIMER(sec) :10
CALL RESTRICT TIMER(min) :0 CO DIAL DELAY TIMER(100ms) :1
CO RLS GUARD TIMER(100ms) :2 RING OFF TIMER(100ms) :60
RING ON TIMER(100ms) :2 CO WARN TONE TIMER(sec) :180
System Timer 2
CFW NO ANS TIMER(sec) :15 DISA-DID NO ANS TIMER(sec) :20

VMIB USER RECORD TMR(sec) :20 VMIB VALID MSG TIMER(sec) :4
DOOR OPEN TIMER(100ms) :20 ICM BOX TIMER(sec) :30
DIAL TONE TIMER(sec) :10 INTER DGT TIMER(sec) :5
MSG WAIT REM TONE TMR(min) :0 PAGE TIMEOUT TIMER(sec) :15
PAUSE TIMER(sec) :3 PRESET CFW TIMER(sec) :10
System Timer 3
SLT HOOK BOUNCE TMR(100ms) :1 SLT MAX HOOK FLASH(100ms) :5

SLT MIN HOOK FLASH(10ms) :20 SLT RING PHASE(sec) :5
STA AUTO RLS TIMER(sec) :60 UNSUPER CONF TMR(min) :10
WAKE UP FAIL TIMER(sec) :20 WARM LINE TIMER(sec) :5
PP WINK TIMER(10ms) :10 ENBLOCK INT DGT TIMER(sec) :10
CCR TIME OUT TIMER(sec) :15
175
Admin Programming
Toll Data TOLL Table Data Entry

================================================
Allow TABLE A
Bin 1 : 012
Bin 2 :
Bin 3 :
Bin 4 :
Bin 5 :
:
Allow TABLE B
Bin 1 : 015
Bin 2 :
Bin 3 :
Bin 4 :
Bin 5 :
Deny TABLE A
Bin 1 : 011
Bin 2 : 080
Bin 3 : 070
Bin 4 :
Bin 5 :
Deny TABLE B
Bin 1 : 001
Bin 2 : 002
Bin 3 :
Bin 4 :
Bin 5 :
Canned TOLL Table Data Entry

================================================
Canned Allow TABLE
Bin 1 : 080
Bin 2 : 012
Bin 3 : 015
Bin 4 :
Bin 5 :
Canned Deny TABLE

Bin 1 : 115
Bin 2 :
Bin 3 :
Bin 4 :
Bin 5 :
176
Admin Programming
LCR Data
LCR Table Data Entry
================================================
LCR Control Data
================================================
LCR_ACCESS_MODE : (M00)DISABLE LCR
MON : DAY_ZONE(1)
TUE : DAY_ZONE(1)
WED : DAY_ZONE(1)
THU : DAY_ZONE(1)
FRI : DAY_ZONE(1)
SAT : DAY_ZONE(1)
SUN : DAY_ZONE(1)
DAY_ZONE 1
TIME_ZONE_1 : 08 - 18
TIME_ZONE_2 : 19 - 24
TIME_ZONE_3 : 00 - 07
DAY_ZONE 2
TIME_ZONE_1 : 00 - 24
TIME_ZONE_2 : ... - ...
TIME_ZONE_3 : ... - ...
DAY_ZONE 3
TIME_ZONE_1 : 00 - 24
TIME_ZONE_2 : ... - ...
TIME_ZONE_3 : ... - ...
LCR Table LDT(Leading Digit Table) Entry

================================================
LDT Table (000)
CODE : Working Mode : BOTH
DMT_INDEX 0 :.. 00 00 00
DMT_INDEX 1 :.. 12 23 22
DMT_INDEX 2 :.. .. ..
LDT Table (001)

DMT_INDEX 0 :.. .. ..
DMT_INDEX 1 :.. .. ..
DMT_INDEX 2 :.. .. ..
LDT Table (002)

DMT_INDEX 0 :.. .. ..
DMT_INDEX 1 :.. .. ..
DMT_INDEX 2 :.. .. ..
:
177
Admin Programming
Other Tables Emergency Code Data Entry

================================================
Entry 0 : 119
Entry 1 : 911
Entry 2 : 00911
Entry 3 :
Entry 4 :
Entry 5 :
Entry 6 :
Entry 7 :
Entry 8 :
Entry 9 :
Author Code Data Entry

================================================
Entry 1 : 12345
Entry 2 : 34567
Entry 3 : 98765
Entry 4 :
Entry 5 :
Entry 6 :
Entry 7 :
CCR(Customer Call Routing) Table Entry

================================================
DVU Index : 1
------------------------
CCR Entry 1 : HUNT 620
CCR Entry 2 : STA 101
CCR Entry 3 : SPD 2500
CCR Entry 4 : INT PAGE 1
CCR Entry 5 : ....
CCR Entry 6 : ....
CCR Entry 7 : ....
CCR Entry 8 : ....
CCR Entry 9 : ....
CCR Entry 10 : ....
DVU Index : 2
------------------------
CCR Entry 1 : ....
CCR Entry 2 : ....
CCR Entry 3 : ....
CCR Entry 4 : ....
CCR Entry 5 : ....
CCR Entry 6 : ....
CCR Entry 7 : ....
CCR Entry 8 : ....
CCR Entry 9 : ....
CCR Entry 10 : ....
Exec/Sec Data Entry

================================================
Entry 1 : .... / ....
Entry 2 : .... / ....
Entry 3 : .... / ....
Entry 4 : .... / ....
Entry 5 : .... / ....
Entry 6 : .... / ....
Entry 7 : .... / ....
Entry 8 : .... / ....
178
Admin Programming
STN Group Station Group Assignment
STA GRP PILOT NUMBER : 620-667

================================================================
Station Group : 620
Group Type: CIRCULAR GROUP
=============================================
Group Member
---------------------------------------------
100 101 102 .... .... .... .... ....

.... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
.... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
.... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
.... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
.... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
.... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
.... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
---------------------------------------------
ANNC1 TIMER :15 ANNC2 TIMER :0
ANNC1 LOC :VMIB(NOT_ASG)
ANNC2 LOC :VMIB(NOT_ASG)
ANNC2 RPT TIMER :0 ANNC 2 REPEAT :OFF
OVERFLOW DEST :NOT ASSIGNED
OVERFLOW TIMER :180 WRAP UP TIMER :2
NO ANS TIMER :15 PILOT HUNT :ON
REPORT NO MEM :OFF MUSIC SOURCE :0
Station Group : 621

Group Type: NOT ASSIGNED
=============================================
179
Admin Programming
Nation Specific NATION GAIN PRINT

===============================================
DTIB/DTIB:26
DTIB/SLIB:33
DTIB/WTIB:26
DTIB/ACOB:33
DTIB/DCOB:33
DTIB/VMIB:29
DTIB/DTMF:08
DTIB/TONE:32
DTIB/MUSIC1:29
DTIB/MUSIC2:29
DTIB/MUSIC3:29
SYSTEM TONE FREQ

==============================================
DIAL TONE FREQUENCY: (T1:0425 / T2:0000)

RBACK TONE FREQUENCY: (T1:0425 / T2:0000)
BUSY TONE FREQUENCY: (T1:0425 / T2:0000)
ERROR TONE FREQUENCY: (T1:0620 / T2:0000)
DDIAL TONE FREQUENCY: (T1:0350 / T2:0440)
DIFFERENTIAL RING FREQ

==============================================
DIFF RING FREQ(1): (T1:1000 / T2:1020)

DIFF RING FREQ(2): (T1:0890 / T2:0910)
DIFF RING FREQ(3): (T1:1260 / T2:1280)
DIFF RING FREQ(4): (T1:0800 / T2:0820)
DISTINCT RING FREQ

==============================================
DIST RING FREQ(1): (T1:0480 / T2:0000)

DIST RING FREQ(2): (T1:0400 / T2:0000)
DIST RING FREQ(3): (T1:0620 / T2:0000)
DIST RING FREQ(4): (T1:0770 / T2:0000)
TONE CADENCE
==============================================
RBACK TONE CADENCE: (T1:0050 / T2:0100)

BUSY TONE CADENCE: (T1:0025 / T2:0025)
ERROR TONE CADENCE: (T1:0012 / T2:0012)
S_DIAL TONE CADENCE: (T1:0070 / T2:0000)
All Data COMPLETE DATABASE PRINTING

--------------------------
print above all
180

5) Aut. Tel.

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

5) Aut. Tel.

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

5) Aut. Tel.

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

IMCOSTM

Integrated Multimedia Communication System

UPPER VIEW REAR VIEW &

RIGHT SIDE VIEW LEFT SIDE VIEW

SWITCH for SWITCH for RJ11 SOCKET for

IMCOStm Currently the only system in the world type approved by

220 mm 196 mm 206 mm 90 mm

IMCOStm Currently the only system in the world type approved by

220 mm 196 mm 206 mm 90 mm

IMCOStm Currently the only system in the world type approved by

UPPER VIEW SIDE VIEW

220 mm 244 mm 260 mm AB

IMCOStm Currently the only system in the world type approved by

UPPER VIEW SIDE VIEW

IMCOStm Currently the only system in the world type approved by

REAR VIEW SIDE VIEW

Description* Junction Box used to connect Automatic Telephone.

IMCOStm Currently the only system in the world type approved by

FRONT VIEW &

N.O. Free Contact Output

Analogue Telephone Line Input

Sound Power Telephone Power Input

24 V DC or 220 V AC Power Supply

IMCOStm Currently the only system in the world type approved by

FRONTAL VIEW SIDE VIEW

FIXING DETAILS & Cable Gland

IMCOStm Currently the only system in the world type approved by

1. INDOOR TELEPHONE SET TF 205A

3. SETTING SWITCHES, VOLUME AND TONE ADJUSTMENT, SPECIAL KEYS

R - Flash key. Used to transfer the incoming call to an other extension.

3. SETTING SWITCHES, VOLUME AND TONE ADJUSTMENT, SPECIAL KEYS

Under the telephone directory label, are located one switch:

LD-MF - Set the selection mode to decadic (LD) or multifrequency (MF)

1. CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING ....................................................... 1

2. PRE-PROGRAMMED DATABASE ................................................................... 35

5. SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMING........................................................................ 76

6. SYSTEM TIMERS............................................................................................. 101

7. DCOB ATTRIBUTE (PGM 186 - PGM 187)..................................................... 106

8. STATION GROUP PROGRAMMING (PGM 190 - PGM 191).......................... 108

9. ISDN PROGRAM ............................................................................................. 119

10. LCR .................................................................................................................. 123

11. TOLL TABLE ................................................................................................... 131

12. TABLES ........................................................................................................... 135

13. NETWORKING ATTRIBUTE ........................................................................... 146

14. VOIB ATTRIBUTE ........................................................................................... 151

15. NATION SPECIFIC PROGRAMMING ............................................................. 152

16. INITIALIZATION (PGM 450) ......................................................................... 167

17. PRINT PROT DATABASE (PGM 451).......................................................... 168

1. CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

1.2 TO ENTER THE PROGRAMMING MODE

ENTER PROGRAM CODE

1.3 PERMANENT UPDATE PROCEDURE

1.4 NUMBERING PLAN

NUMBER ITEM REMARK

1) For the stations

NUMBER ITEM REMARK

2) For the attendant

NUMBER ITEM REMARK

3) Flexible Button Programming Code